JP2012135469A - Game system - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To allow a game player to notice the entire stop display.SOLUTION: A terminal device picks up an image of an image pickup object (step S104B). A game system determines specific information to be output by a terminal device in accordance with the stop display of a symbol in the entire variable display area included in the picked-up image (step S203B, S204). The terminal device outputs the determined specific information (step S112).

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system. Specifically, the present invention relates to a gaming system including a gaming machine including a variable display device having a variable display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a terminal device that has a photographing unit and an output unit and can be operated by a player.

  Conventionally, there has been a slot machine in which at least one of the reel symbols is two-dimensionally encoded (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-229031 A

  However, in the slot machine of Patent Document 1, the player pays attention to the two-dimensionally encoded symbol, but just because there is a two-dimensionally encoded symbol, the degree of attention to the entire variable display area. There was a problem that it could not be increased.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming system that allows a player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) Variable display device having a variable display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols (for example, effect display device 709, first special symbol display 708a, second special symbol display 708b, reels 802L, 802C, 802R) A terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 800, pachinko gaming machine 700), a photographing unit (for example, camera unit 190), and an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker). ) Including a gaming system (e.g., gaming system 10),
The terminal device
Including a photographing control means (for example, step S104B in FIG. 77, step S104C in FIG. 81) for photographing the image to be photographed by controlling the photographing unit,
The gaming system further includes:
Specific information (for example, related to a game) output from the output unit in response to a stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area included in an image (for example, a moving image or a still image) captured by the photographing unit Determining means (for example, step S203B in FIG. 77) for determining the content (current game state, probability variation latency, internally established bonus type), content not related to the game (image, wallpaper, music, ringtone, AR, URL). , Step S204, Step S105, Step S106, Step S204C in FIG. 81) (in any of the portable terminal 100, the information providing server 200, the pachinko gaming machine 700, the slot machine 800, the card unit, and the management device included in the gaming system 10) May be provided),
The terminal device further includes:
Output control means (for example, step S112 of FIG. 77, FIG. 81) for controlling the output unit to output the specific information determined by the determination means is included.

  According to such a configuration, an image to be photographed is photographed by the terminal device. The gaming system determines the specific information to be output by the terminal device in accordance with the symbol stop display in the entire variable display area included in the photographed image. The determined specific information is output by the terminal device.

  For this reason, in order to output the specific information, the player shoots a stop display of symbols in the entire variable display area. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming system that allows the player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

(2) In the gaming system of (1) above,
The gaming machine is
Positioning means (for example, the outline of the transparent window 803) when the stop display is photographed by the photographing unit is provided.

  According to such a configuration, the position of the image indicated by the image data for each shooting can be prevented from being shifted. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the determination when the specific information corresponding to the stop display included in the image is determined.

(3) In the gaming system of (1) or (2) above,
The determining means determines the specific information corresponding to a combination of a plurality of symbol shapes (for example, a cross line of seven symbols) in the stop display of the entire variable display area.

  According to such a configuration, a combination of a plurality of symbol shapes in the stop display of the entire variable display area can be handled without affecting the shape of the symbol itself (shape, pattern or color, or combination thereof). Information for determining specific information can be used.

(4) In the game system according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The determination means determines the specific information corresponding to a combination of a plurality of determination means (for example, markers) attached to at least a part of a symbol in the stop display of the entire variable display area.

  According to such a configuration, the specific information corresponding to the combination of a plurality of determination means attached to at least a part of the symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area is determined without affecting the form of the symbols themselves. Information.

(5) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The determination means determines the specific information corresponding to a combination of a plurality of determination means (for example, markers) attached to portions other than symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area.

  According to such a configuration, the specific information corresponding to the combination of the plurality of determination means attached to the portions other than the symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area is determined without affecting the form of the symbols themselves. Information.

(6) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The determining means is a combination of a plurality of symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area or a combination of colors of a plurality of portions other than the symbols (for example, the left reel is red, the middle reel is blue, the right reel is The specific information corresponding to (yellow) is determined.

  According to such a configuration, a combination of a plurality of symbol colors or a combination of colors of a plurality of parts other than the symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area can be identified without affecting the shape of the symbol itself. It can be information for determining information.

(7) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The determining means determines the specific information corresponding to the light emission mode of the backlight (for example, the reel LED 855 emits light in a V shape) in the stop display of the entire variable display area.

  According to such a configuration, the light emission mode of the backlight in the stop display of the entire variable display area can be used as information for determining the corresponding specific information without affecting the form of the symbol itself.

(8) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The determination means notifies the type of the gaming state corresponding to the stop display (for example, the latent effect state corresponding to the display result, the type of bonus established internally corresponding to the outcome) as the specific information. The information is determined.

  According to such a configuration, the specific information is output from the terminal device, whereby the player is notified of the type of gaming state corresponding to the stop display. For this reason, the player can be notified of the type of gaming state corresponding to the stop display. As a result, it is possible to provide a game system that is friendly to a player who is not familiar with the stop display.

(9) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The gaming machine can start a game by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result is derived to the variable display device to end one game. It is a slot machine that can be awarded according to the result,
The gaming machine is
Operation accepting means (for example, a start switch 807, a stop switch 808L, 808C, 808R, a MAXBET switch 806, etc.) for accepting an operation for advancing the game;
Prior determination means (for example, internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Game control means (for example, a main control unit) for controlling the progress of the game according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation received by the operation reception means;
Delay control means (for example, freeze generation processing) for performing delay control (for example, freeze) for delaying the progress of the game due to establishment of a predetermined delay condition (for example, end of BB);
Derivation operation accepting means (for example, stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R) for accepting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Derivation control means (for example, reel rotation processing) for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means;
Means for performing specific variation control for temporarily stopping and re-variable display in at least one of the plurality of variable display portions in the variable display region of the variable display device when the delay control is performed; Specific fluctuation control means (for example, specific fluctuation control processing, temporary stop control) that determines a special stop display that is not stopped by the derivation control means when the specific fluctuation control is performed, and temporarily stops the special stop display; With
The determining means determines the specific information according to the special stop display that is temporarily stopped while the specific variation control is being performed.

  According to such a configuration, before an operation for advancing the game is accepted and the display result is derived on the variable display device, it is determined whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and the determination result The progress of the game is controlled in accordance with the accepted operation, and delay control is performed to delay the progress of the game due to the establishment of a predetermined delay condition, and the display result is derived by the variable display device. When the control is performed so that the variable display device derives the display result according to the determination result and the received operation, and the delay control is performed, a plurality of operations in the variable display region of the variable display device are performed. At least one of the variable display sections is subjected to specific fluctuation control for temporarily stopping and re-variable display, and is stopped as a display result when the specific fluctuation control is performed. Specially stop display determined never, 該特 by stopping the display is temporarily stopped, once in accordance with the special stop display is stopped while the specific variation control is being performed, the particular information is determined.

  For this reason, the special stop display that is not stopped as a display result when the delay control is performed and the specific variation control is performed is temporarily stopped, the specific information is determined according to the special stop display, and the terminal device Is output. As a result, the value of delay control can be further increased.

(10) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
The gaming machine can start a game by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result is derived to the variable display device to end one game. It is a slot machine that can be awarded according to the result,
The gaming machine is
Operation accepting means (for example, a start switch 807, a stop switch 808L, 808C, 808R, a MAXBET switch 806, etc.) for accepting an operation for advancing the game;
Prior determination means (for example, internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Game control means (for example, a main control unit) for controlling the progress of the game according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation received by the operation reception means;
Derivation operation accepting means (for example, stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R) for accepting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Derivation control means (for example, reel rotation processing) for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means;
Informing means (for example, navigation effect execution processing, liquid crystal display 851) for notifying information (for example, navigation effect) according to the determination result of the prior determination means,
The informing means associates each of a plurality of types of the specific information with the stop display mode corresponding to the determination result (for example, (α) A line for aligning the A information ⇔ design is the upper row, and the B information ⇔ design is Information indicating that the line to be aligned is the middle, the line to align the C information ⇔ design is the bottom, (β) the information to align A information 赤 is red 7, the symbol to align B information 青 is blue 7, and the symbol to align C information 黄 is yellow 7) It is characterized by doing.

  According to such a configuration, before an operation for advancing the game is accepted and the display result is derived on the variable display device, it is determined whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and the determination result The progress of the game is controlled according to the accepted operation, and an operation for causing the variable display device to derive the display result is accepted, and the variable display device is caused to derive the display result according to the determination result and the accepted operation. Control is performed, and information indicating the association between each of a plurality of types of specific information and a stop display mode corresponding to the determination result is notified according to the determination result.

  Therefore, the association between the specific information and the stop display mode corresponding to the determination result is notified, so that the player can derive the stop display according to the specific information desired to be acquired. To operate. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to derive a specific stop display, and the player operates the derivation operation accepting unit aiming at the timing at which the specific stop display is made, so that the interest can be improved.

(11) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by comprising timing notifying means for notifying the player of the timing for capturing an image including the stop display by the image capturing unit.

  According to such a configuration, the player is notified of the timing of capturing an image including a stop display by the capturing unit. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the progress of the game without being distracted by the shooting except for the timing of shooting. As a result, the stagnation of the progress of the game can be avoided as much as possible.

(12) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by further comprising a reduced display control means for controlling the stop display so that the entire variable display area is reduced and displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the stop display is displayed by reducing the entire variable display area. For this reason, it is possible to make it easier to shoot compared to the case of shooting the entire variable display area that has not been reduced.

(13) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (12) above,
The specific information is display data;
The output control unit controls the output unit to display the specific information determined by the determination unit so as to overlap the image captured by the imaging unit.

  According to such a configuration, the determined specific information is displayed on the terminal device so as to be superimposed on the image photographed by the photographing unit. For this reason, the sense of unity between the specific information and the captured image can be improved. As a result, the interest in displaying images on the terminal device can be improved.

(14) In the gaming system of (13) above,
The display data is augmented reality display data with respect to the stop display (for example, display data for displaying a character image on or around a shot appearance image).

  According to such a configuration, when the specific information is output from the terminal device, an image indicated by the augmented reality display data as the specific information is displayed over the stop display. For this reason, the stop display image displayed on the terminal device can be interesting.

(15) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (14),
A game history storage means for storing a game history in the gaming machine;
The determining means determines the specific information according to the game history stored by the game history storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the game history in the gaming machine is stored, and the specific information is determined according to the stored game history. For this reason, since specific information changes according to a game history, the interest of the output of specific information can be improved.

(16) The stop display is a display of the symbols in the entire variable display area when the symbols of the gaming machine including a variable display device having a variable display area that variably displays a plurality of types of symbols,
The gaming system includes a determining unit that determines specific information to be output from the terminal device in accordance with the stop display included in the image captured by the terminal device.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming system that allows a player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

(17) A terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having a photographing unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). ,
The photographing unit for photographing an image including a stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area when the symbol of a gaming machine having a variable display device having a variable display region for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols is stopped. Photographing control means (for example, step S104B in FIG. 77, step S104C in FIG. 81) for controlling
A transmission control unit that controls the communication unit to transmit the image to a determination unit that determines specific information to be output from the output unit according to the stop display included in the image captured by the imaging control unit. For example, step S107B in FIG. 77, step S107C in FIG. 81),
Reception control means for controlling the communication unit to receive the specific information from the determination means (for example, step S111 in FIGS. 77 and 81);
Output control means for controlling the output unit to output the specific information received by the reception control means (for example, step S112 in FIGS. 77 and 81).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a terminal device that allows a player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

(18) A terminal device (for example, mobile terminal 100) having an imaging unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). ,
The photographing unit for photographing an image including a stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area when the symbol of a gaming machine having a variable display device having a variable display region for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols is stopped. Photographing control means for controlling
Determining means for determining specific information to be output from the output unit according to the stop display included in the image photographed by the photographing control means;
Output control means for controlling the output unit to output the specific information determined by the determination means.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a terminal device that allows a player to pay attention to the entire stop display. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need to communicate with a device different from the terminal device (for example, a server including a determining unit) in order to determine the specific information corresponding to the stop display. For this reason, the system configuration can be simplified.

(19) Executed by a terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having a photographing unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). A game program (for example, a game application),
The photographing unit for photographing an image including a stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area when the symbol of a gaming machine having a variable display device having a variable display region for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols is stopped. (For example, step S104B in FIG. 77, step S104C in FIG. 81) for controlling
The step of controlling the communication unit to transmit the image to a determination unit that determines specific information to be output from the output unit according to the stop display included in the captured image (for example, step S107B in FIG. 77) 81, step S107C) of FIG.
Controlling the communication unit to receive the specific information from the determining means (for example, step S111 in FIGS. 77 and 81);
The terminal device is caused to execute a step of controlling the output unit so as to output the received specific information (for example, step S112 in FIGS. 77 and 81).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game program that allows the player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

  (20) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 800, pachinko gaming machine 700) has a variable display device (for example, an effect display device 709, a first special symbol display device 708a) having a variable display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols. A terminal device that captures an image including a stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area when the symbol of the gaming machine having the second special symbol display 708b and the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R is stopped (for example, , A portable terminal 100), and a determination unit that determines specific information to be output from an output unit (eg, display unit 140, speaker) of the terminal device in accordance with the stop display included in the captured image. A terminal device that transmits an image, receives the specific information from the determining means, and outputs the received specific information Characterized in that it comprises the variable display device for displaying the stop display photographed by.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the game system in this Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the characteristic of control of hit type including big hit and small hit in a tabular form. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of a pseudo | simulation series. It is a figure which shows the content of the open pattern data table in a table format. In an effect display apparatus, it is a display screen figure which shows the example of an effect aspect until the reach effect of a super reach is performed after a reach state is started. In the effect display device, a display screen diagram showing an example of a development aspect of an effect when a development effect such as a development effect without re-variation or a development effect after re-change is performed when super-reach A to C change display is performed. is there. FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram illustrating a curl effect performed before displaying pseudo-ream chances in the effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st determination table at the time of a normal state deviation, and the 2nd determination table at the time of a normal state deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st determination table at the time-shortage state shift, and the 2nd determination table at the time-shift state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table at the time of normal state probability variation big hit, and the judgment table at the time short state probability variation big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal state normal big hit determination table and the short time normal big hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table at the time of normal state sudden hit, and the determination table at the time short state sudden hit big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a normal state small hit determination table and a short time small hit determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a normal symbol display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect design (decoration design) in an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the portable terminal in this Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the information provision server in this Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process for acquisition of the specific information performed with a portable terminal and an information provision server in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the aspect when a player image | photographs the imaging | photography object area | region of a pachinko gaming machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a 1st figure which shows the example of the image displayed on a portable terminal in 1st Embodiment. It is a 2nd figure which shows the example of the image displayed on a portable terminal in 1st Embodiment. It is a 3rd figure which shows the example of the image displayed on a portable terminal in 1st Embodiment. It is a 4th figure which shows the example of the image displayed on a portable terminal in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the provision information table in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the aspect when a player image | photographs the imaging | photography object area | region of a pachinko gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process for acquisition of the specific information performed with a portable terminal and an information provision server in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st figure which shows the example of the image displayed on a portable terminal in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd figure which shows the example of the image displayed on a portable terminal in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 3rd figure which shows the example of the image displayed on a portable terminal in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination, (b) is a symbol combination and special combination of a predetermined special appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to an appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object part and determination value number regarding the special part and small part in a general gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object combination and determination value number regarding the re-game player in a general gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object combination and the number of determination values of RB in BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery object part and determination value number of RB in non-BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order promotion replays 1-6. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order maintenance replays 1-5. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order rush replays 1-4. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any one of pushing order melons 1-5. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning any of weak strawberries 1-4, strong strawberries 1-4, weak grapes 1-4, and strong grapes 1-4. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning a left melon or a middle right melon in RB in non-BB. It is a flowchart for demonstrating an internal lottery process. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the kind of freeze, (b) is a figure for demonstrating a freeze lottery table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a reel rotation process. In the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example when the player shoots the shooting target area of the slot machine 800 and an example of an image displayed on the mobile terminal 100. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process for acquisition of the specific information performed with a portable terminal and an information provision server in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the provision information table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example when the player image | photographs the imaging | photography object area | region of a slot machine in the modification of 3rd Embodiment, and the example of the image displayed on a portable terminal. It is a figure which shows the example of the aspect of the characteristic of the picked-up image analyzed when the specific information in the modification of 3rd Embodiment is determined. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process for acquisition of the specific information performed with the portable terminal 100 and the information provision server 200 in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the imaging | photography result information table in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the provision information table in 4th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a gaming system 10 according to the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 1, a gaming system 10 includes a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 700 and a slot machine 800), a portable terminal 100 (for example, a portable computer 100A and a portable telephone 100B), and a server (for example, Information providing server 200).

  The portable terminal 100 such as the portable computer 100A and the portable telephone 100B, and the server such as the information providing server 200 are connected to be communicable via the communication network 900. The communication network 900 includes a local area network (LAN), a wide area network (WAN), the Internet, a mobile communication network, a public line network, and the like. The mobile communication network includes a base station and a packet communication network. Accordingly, the portable terminal 100 such as the portable computer 100A and the portable telephone 100B and the server such as the information providing server 200 can perform predetermined data communication with each other.

  In the first embodiment, the information providing server 200 provides specific information according to a predetermined image to be photographed of the pachinko gaming machine 700 photographed by the mobile terminal 100. Hereinafter, in the first embodiment, an outline of configurations and functions of the pachinko gaming machine 700, the portable terminal 100, and the information providing server 200, and a process for providing specific information will be described.

[Configuration and function of pachinko gaming machine 700]
First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 700 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 700. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 706 of the pachinko gaming machine 700. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of hit type control including big hits and small hits in a tabular form.

  The pachinko gaming machine 700 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 700 includes a glass door frame 702 formed in a frame shape that can be opened and closed in the game frame. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 706).

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 703 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 702. Under the hitting ball supply tray 703, there are an extra ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 703, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 705 for emitting hitting balls (game balls). Is provided. A game board 706 (see FIG. 3) is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 702. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 707 is formed on the front surface of the game board 706 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down. In the game area 707, a large number of nails 702 for guiding a game ball are planted, and a plurality of windmills 703 and a stage 704 are provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 707, an effect display device 709 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. In the effect display device 709, a change display (also referred to as variable display, update display, or cyclic display) of effect symbols (decorative symbols) synchronized with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. The variation display of the effect symbol is executed in various variations such as scroll display and on-site switching display. The effect display device 709 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each. In the effect display device 709, an effect symbol display area for displaying an effect symbol on the display screen is provided. For example, three (plural) “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed in the effect symbol display area. There is a symbol display area as a display area for variably displaying the effect symbols. Each of these three effect symbols is an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. The effect display device 709 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 708a (not shown) is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer executes the effect display on the effect display device 709 along with the variable display. When the second special symbol display unit 708b (not shown) is executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect display is executed by the effect display device in accordance with the variation display. The situation can be easily understood.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of displaying numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. In other words, the first special symbol display 708a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. The second special symbol display 708b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of displaying numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. In other words, the second special symbol display 708b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display unit 708a and the second special symbol display unit 708b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator. The first special symbol is subjected to the variable display on the condition that the second special symbol display unit 708b does not execute the variable display of the second special symbol. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed on the condition that the first special symbol display unit 708a does not execute the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed without being variably displayed at the same time.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 713 or the second start winning opening) 714), the display condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The game is started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening (a game ball has entered). Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  In the following description, the fact that the game ball has won the first start prize opening 713 may be referred to as a first start prize, and the fact that the game ball has won the second start prize opening 714 will be referred to as a second start prize. There is a case. The data related to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as reserved storage data that is a right to perform variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 755 of a game control microcomputer 7560 described later. On-hold storage data for the first start prize is stored in the first on-hold storage buffer as first on-hold storage data with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit, and on-premise storage data for the second start prize is stored in a predetermined number (for example, 4). Is stored in the second reserved storage buffer as second reserved storage data.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 700, a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle 705 and launching a game ball to the game area 707 using the rotational force of the driving motor (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 707 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 713 and is detected by the first start port switch 713a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 708a starts the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 713. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 714 and is detected by the second start port switch 714a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 708b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 714. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b. The effect design (decoration design) is displayed as a variation design. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the period of variable display is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 708b, the effect display device 709 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 708a, the second special symbol display device 708b, and the effect display device 709 described above are variable display devices that perform variable display of identification information and derive and display the display result, and are used as a variable display unit. It is done.

  In the effect display device 709, when the variable display is started, for example, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols start the variable display. Then, the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are variably displayed basically stop in a predetermined order (for example, a predetermined order such as the order of the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and the middle effect symbol). When a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of variation display, all the left, middle and right effect symbols are stopped and the display result is confirmed. The order in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols stop may be other than the order of the left, right, and center symbols. Further, the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be stopped simultaneously.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 713 is provided below the effect display device 709. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the first start opening switch 713a.

  A variable winning ball device (electric tulip) having a second starting winning port 714 (second starting port) through which a game ball can win is located below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 713. ) 715 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the second start opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 714 (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 714 than the first starting winning port 713. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 714. Note that, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). As described above, the state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state may be a state where the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the second start winning port 714.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning port 713 and the second start winning port 714 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 715 is very likely to win the second start winning port 714. The first start winning opening 713 is provided directly below the effect display device 709, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 709 and the first start winning opening 713 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail 702 is densely arranged around the periphery of the first start winning opening 713, or the arrangement of the nails 702 around the first starting winning opening 713 is difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 713, The winning rate may be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning port 713.

  Below the first special symbol display 708a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 713, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) 4 is displayed. There is provided a first special symbol reservation storage display 718a (not shown) consisting of two indicators (for example, LEDs). The first special symbol storage memory indicator 718a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 708b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 714, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 718b (not shown) is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 718b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 709 is provided with a first reserved memory display unit 718c that displays the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 718d that displays the second reserved memory number. (Each display area is provided). In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a variable winning ball device 715 that opens and closes only with respect to the second starting winning port 714 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 714 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that opens and closes.

  A reach state may occur during the effect symbol display on the effect display device 709. Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitute a part of the combination of jackpot symbols, the variation of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. Or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols fluctuate synchronously while constituting all or part of a combination of jackpot symbols. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable area areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 709 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set such that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than a normal reach (normal reach), and there is a high degree of reliability for the big hit. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a first special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The first special variable winning ball device 720 includes an opening / closing plate, and can be changed between an open state (first state) in which a game ball can win and a closed state (second state) in which no game ball wins. It is a variable winning device. Note that the first special variable winning ball device 720 may be configured so that in the closed state, it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win). Thus, the state in which the first special variable winning ball device 720 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the first special variable winning ball device 720.

  The first special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is generated when a specific display result (a big hit symbol in a 15-round big hit gaming state described later) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a or the second special symbol display 708b. In the specific game state (15 round big hit game state), the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 721, so that the big winning opening as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 723.

  In the 15-round big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the first special variable winning ball apparatus 720 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the first special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected. In the present embodiment, the control example in which the first special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened only once in one round is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Control may be performed so that one special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 2, a second special variable winning ball device 745 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 709. The second special variable winning ball device 745 is a variable winning device that can change between an open state (first state) in which game balls are easy to win and a closed state (second state) in which game balls are difficult to win. is there. The second special variable winning ball device 745 may be configured not to win in the closed state. As described above, the state in which the second special variable winning ball device 745 is in the closed state may be a state where the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the second special variable winning ball device 745.

  The second special variable winning ball apparatus 745 displays a specific display result (a big hit symbol in the big hit gaming state or a small hit symbol in the small hit gaming state to be described later) on the first special symbol display 708a or the second special symbol display 708b. ) Is displayed and displayed in a specific game state (two round big hit game state or small hit game state) that is generated when the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 747, so that a big winning opening serving as a winning area is obtained. It becomes an open state. A game ball that has won a prize winning opening is distributed to any one of the three holes by the prize winning opening allocating unit 746 and is then detected by the count switch 746a.

  In the two-round big hit game state or the small hit game state, repeated continuation control is performed in which the second special variable winning ball device 745 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, the state in which the second special variable winning ball device 745 is opened is called a round. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected. In the present embodiment, the control example in which the second special variable winning ball apparatus 745 is opened only once in one round is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Control may be performed so that the two special variable winning ball devices 745 are opened.

  It should be noted that, depending on whether the game is opened in the two-round big hit game state, which will be described later, or in the small hit game state, which will be described later, which game ball has won the big prize opening of the second special variable winning ball device 745 Configuration so that the allocation rate is different depending on whether it is distributed to the hole (not shown, but the inclination changes to the extent that the player cannot confirm it visually, for example, in the two-round big hit game state and the small hit game state) Two-round jackpot game state, and the size of the hole is changed, the position of the member that forms the passage of the game ball in a position that is not visible to the player is changed) The time is drawn so that it is easier to enter the hole in the foreground than in the small hit game state.

  Hereinafter, the first special variable winning ball device 720 and the second special variable winning ball device 745 may be collectively referred to as a special variable winning ball device.

  A normal symbol display 710 (not shown) is provided below the effect display device 709. The normal symbol display 710 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the display variation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized at the time of lighting) are alternately turned on to perform the variable display. For example, if the left lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol “◯”), the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 715 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 714). To change.

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol holding storage display 741 (not shown) having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 732 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 732, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold storage display 741 increases the number of indicators to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable symbol display on the normal symbol indicator 710 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. There are four upper limit values for the number of ordinary symbols stored, and the normal symbol storage memory display 741 lights the display with these four as upper limits.

  Decorative LEDs 725 flashing and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 707 of the game board 706, and an outlet 726 into which a hit ball that has not been won is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 727R and 727L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 707. A top frame LED 728a, a left frame LED 728b, and a right frame LED 728c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 707. For example, the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c are related displays in the pseudo-continuous production as the repetitive variation pattern (each re-variation period (including the initial variation period) during one variation period). When an effect such that the effect is executed) is executed, blinking control is performed.

  The repeated variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a specific effect display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times after a special symbol and an effect symbol change display is started and a display result is derived and displayed, and then a reach effect is executed. . Here, the specific effect display is, for example, an effect display such as a re-change effect display, and if it is an effect display that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, for example, an effect display other than the re-change display such as a notice display is possible. May be. In this embodiment, as an example of a repeated variation pattern, an example will be described in which a pseudo variation pattern that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times with re-variation as a specific effect display is used.

  Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all symbol sequences (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of re-variation repeated executions (also referred to as quasi-continuous re-variation times), the greater the reliability that will be the big hit (when the big hit is made for all the selection ratios, including when the big hit is out of place The degree of the ratio selected in the above, the ratio of the jackpot, that is, the reliability of the jackpot) is increased. More specifically, the ratio selected when it is determined that the jackpot is high. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, a combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 709 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The combination of temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo continuous chances) composed of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. Further, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, some reach effect may be executed as a final reach state.

  Also, a prize ball LED 751 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 728b, and a ball cut LED 752 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 728c. . The top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, the right frame LED 728c, and the decoration LED 725 are an example of an effect light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 700. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 700 (not shown).

  In FIG. 4, (A) shows a hit type table showing characteristics of hit type control including big hits and small hits, and (B) shows the base and variable time state after the end of the big hit gaming state of sudden big hits. Shown is an abrupt big hit base / fluctuation time state selection table used to determine.

  In the hit type table of FIG. 4, for each hit type in the big hit and the small hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the big hit The variation time after the end of the gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the number of times of opening in the big hit (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round are shown. As shown in FIG. 4, as the jackpot gaming state with different numbers of rounds, a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states of 15 rounds of jackpot gaming state and 2 rounds of jackpot gaming state are provided. In the small hit, a small hit game state with the same number of times of opening and open time as the two round big hit game state.

  Specifically, in the 15-round jackpot gaming state, after the first special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened, a predetermined opening state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the opened state). Or a closed state is established in response to the establishment of a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winning balls. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated, and the first special variable winning ball device 720 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  In the two-round big hit gaming state, after the second special variable winning ball apparatus 745 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the open state has elapsed). Or a closed state is established in response to the establishment of a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winning balls. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated, and the second special variable winning ball device 745 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the big hit gaming state reaches two rounds (final round) at which a predetermined upper limit value is reached.

  In this way, the big win of 2 rounds is allowed up to the number of times of opening the big prize opening is less than 15 rounds (2 times in this embodiment), but the opening time of the big prize opening is short (for example, 0 .5 seconds) type of jackpot (type). In the case of the present embodiment, as a big hit of two rounds, the opening time of the grand prize opening is extremely short (0.5 seconds), and substantially a prize ball (a prize ball paid out for the prize) is obtained. There is a hit that is not possible.

  In addition, as a big hit of two rounds, it is possible to provide only a hit where a prize ball cannot be obtained, or only a hit where a prize ball can be obtained. Both a win and a win from which a prize ball can be obtained may be provided.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds or 2 rounds, the probability that the special game state is determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state (the normal game state which is not the probability change state) A type of jackpot (type) that shifts to a high probability state (an abbreviation of a probability variation state, also referred to as a high probability state) is called “probability big hit”. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state is controlled to a time-short state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the production symbol is shortened from the non-time-short state in association with the probability variation state. There is. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise.

  Of the “big hit”, the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the big hit gaming state of 15 rounds or 2 rounds is called “ordinary big hit”. In the present embodiment, an example in which a normal big hit is provided for a big hit of 15 rounds is shown. In addition, a “normal jackpot” may be provided for either or both of 15 round jackpots and 2 round jackpots. Also, the normal big hits may not be provided for both the 15 round big hits and the two round big hits.

  In addition, as a special gaming state, an electric chew support that facilitates (higher frequency) winning in the variable winning ball device 715 by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 715 is opened in association with the probability changing state. It may be controlled to the control state. Note that the special game state may be controlled to the electric chew support control state independently of the probability change state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the game will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability control), control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 715 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 715 Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased. As a result, the game ball becomes easier to start and win (the execution conditions for the variable display in the special symbol displays 708a and 708b and the effect display device 709 are more easily established). In addition, by increasing the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 714 by such control, a gaming state is achieved in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased by such electric Chu support control is the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the ratio “base” is higher than when the control is not performed, it is called “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 715 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 715, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  Furthermore, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to a state in which any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increase control state are combined, You may make it transfer to a high base state. In addition, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to any one of the normal symbol shortening control state, the normal symbol probability changing control state, the opening time extension control state, and the opening number increasing control state, You may make it transfer to a state. As described above, as the electric chew support control, any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increasing control state, any one of a plurality (all) Any control may be performed as long as the control is performed in a combined state or a combined state.

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state may be controlled to the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state accompanying the probability changing state. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the time-saving state and the electric chew support control state independently of the probability changing state. In addition, as a relationship between the short time state and the electric chew support control state in the special game state, the electric chew support control state may be controlled in association with the short time state. You may make it control to a control state.

  In the case of this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the special gaming state is controlled to the electric chew support control state when controlled to the probability variation state, and the electric power is controlled when controlled to the probability variation state. In some cases, the Chu support control state is not controlled. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, when the normal state is entered without being controlled to the probability variation state, it may be controlled to the electric chew support control state in which the period is limited by the number of variable displays.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Further, in this embodiment, “low accuracy low base state”, “high accuracy low base state”, and “high accuracy high base state” are used as terms indicating a combination of the big hit probability state and the base state. Use. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “highly accurate low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state. Note that, for example, when performing electric Chu support control for a case where the state of the big hit probability becomes a low probability state after the big hit gaming state ends, as in the normal big hit, the state of the big hit probability is a low probability state, and The base state is the “low-accuracy and high-base state”, which is a state indicating that the base state is the high-base state.

  As shown in FIG. 4, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, a normal big hit and a probable big hit, are provided. In addition, as a big hit of the two rounds, an abrupt big hit is provided.

  The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the time-short state, and the electric chew support control state (low-accuracy high-base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state. The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the short time state, and the electric chew support control state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state. In the probability variation big hit, the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the electric Chu support control state continue for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

  In the normal big hit, the period until the shorter condition is satisfied, which is the condition that the time reduction state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times of the variable display or the condition that the next big hit occurs. continue. The number of times of variable display in which the time reduction state continues is also referred to as the time reduction number.

  The sudden hit big hit is a big hit in which, after the end of the two round big hit gaming state, control is performed to shift to the probability changing state, the non-time-saving state, and the non-electric Chu support control state (highly accurate low base state). In the sudden big hit, the probability variation state continues for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

  In the big hit, the number of rounds is small (twice) and the opening of the big prize opening is very short (open for 0.5 seconds). When notifying that it has become, it is possible to make it appear to the player as if it has suddenly changed into a certain probability change state, which is called “sudden probability change big hit”. “Suddenly probable big hit” may be referred to by the abbreviation “surprise big hit” or “surprise”. In this embodiment, the two-round probability variation big hit is referred to as “surprise big hit”. Such a big hit is a hit where a winning ball is not substantially obtained since the half-second opening is performed only twice in the big hit gaming state.

  The small hit is a hit (advantageous state) in which the second special variable winning ball device 745 is opened with the same number of times and opening time as the sudden big hit in the gaming state (small hit gaming state) when the small hit is reached. . When a small hit is made, after the small hit gaming state, both the big hit probability and the base state are not changed from those before the start of the small hit gaming state. In this way, the small hit is a hit in which a gaming state such as a big hit probability and a base state is maintained after the small hit gaming state ends and before the start of the small hit gaming state. In this embodiment, the small hit is an example in which the second special variable winning ball apparatus 745 is opened in the small hit gaming state with the same number of times of opening and the same opening time as the sudden big hit. Not limited to this, as for small hits, the opening mode of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 745 does not completely coincide with the opening mode at the time of the big hit, but it is difficult to distinguish from the opening mode at the big hit. It may look like this. In other words, as a small hit, if the opening mode of the second special variable winning ball device 745 is a hit for opening the second special variable winning ball device 745 with approximately the same number of times of opening and approximately the same opening time as the sudden big hit. Good.

  If it is determined that the big hit gaming state of the low probability low base state will be the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state of the high probability low hit state, the base state will be small in the low probability low base state. The low base state is the same as the state after the end of the small hit gaming state when it is determined to win. This makes it difficult for the player to identify whether the winning position is a big hit or a small hit when the winning hole is opened twice in the low probability low base state. The fun of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that the normal big hit may be a big hit in which control is performed to the non-probability changing state, the non-time-short state, and the non-electric Chu support control state (low-probability low base state). Further, the probability variation big hit may be a big hit in which control is performed to be a probability variation state, a non-time-short state, and a non-electric Chu support control state (high probability low base state). In addition, the sudden hit big hit may be a big hit in which control is performed to change into a probability changing state, a time reduction state, and an electric Chu support control state (highly accurate high base state).

  In addition, for the big hit game hit, after the big hit game state, the base state is set to the low base state and the variable time state is set to the non-time-short state, and after the big hit game state is finished, the base state is increased. As the base state, there may be provided separately the second sudden hit big hits in which the variable time state is the short time state, and these sudden hit big hits may be selected at a predetermined ratio.

  In this way, when the first and second big hits are provided, for example, the second special big hit is selected as the second special symbol that is shorter in time than the first special symbol. What is necessary is just to set the ratio made high. In this way, in the electric chew support control state, since the variable winning ball device 715 is frequently changed to the open state, the frequency of the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is increased. Due to the opening of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 745, the 2nd round winning big hit is an unfavorable hit for the player in terms of the number of winning balls obtained compared to the 15th round normal big hit and the probable big hit. Yes, the player is easily discouraged. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the electric chew support control state, the second special symbol display 708b has a two-round sudden probability big hit which is disadvantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls obtained from the normal round of 15 rounds and the probability variation big hit. Even if it occurs due to the display result, if the rate of control in the time-saving state is increased, the player is controlled not only in discouragement like in the case of non-time-saving state but also in the time-saving state. In some cases, the stored memory data is digested at an early stage, so that the player can be satisfied.

  In addition, as a hit where a prize ball cannot be obtained substantially such as a big hit, it is a big hit of 15 rounds. However, since the opening time per round is extremely short, for example, 0.1 seconds, It is also possible that no prize ball is obtained. In addition, as a winning where a prize ball is not substantially obtained, a prize ball is substantially obtained by executing at least one of a small number of rounds or a short opening time per round. Anything that doesn't exist. Specifically, for a big hit (similarly for a small hit) for which no winning ball can be obtained, the number of times of opening is 2 and the opening time is 0.5 seconds, or the number of times of opening is 15 and the opening time is 0.00. What is necessary is just to set like 1 second. Also, instead of a big hit (similarly for a small hit) where no winning ball can be obtained, a big hit gaming state rather than a big hit of 15 rounds, for example, a big hit with two open times and an opening time of 29 seconds Due to the short total open time, the big hit with fewer prize balls than the 15 round big hit may be provided.

  In addition, the number of rounds is the same as the big hit, but the number of rounds is the same, such as providing a big hit with an opening pattern with a long opening time and a big hit with an opening pattern with a short opening time. A plurality of patterns with different opening patterns are provided, so that the selection is executed at different selection ratios when the first special symbol fluctuation display is a big hit and when the second special symbol fluctuation display is a big hit. It may be.

  The big hit and the small hit are the same as the number of times and the opening time of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 745, and it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the big hit or the small hit. Furthermore, since the big hit gaming state is not controlled to the short-time state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the electric chew support control is not performed, compared with the small hit where the big hit probability and the base do not change after the end of the small hit gaming state, In the low-probability-low base state, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the operation status after the end of the big hit gaming state for the sudden hit big hit and after the end of the small hit gaming state. As a result, when a common performance that does not notify that the probability change state is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the smash hit big hit and after the end of the small hit gaming state, whether or not it is in the probability changed state It is difficult for players to recognize. Since such a control state is a state in which the probability variation state is latent, it is called a latent effect state, and the control for making such a latent effect state is called latent effect control. By executing a common performance after the end of the big hit or the small hit, latent production control is performed in which it is impossible to specify whether the state is a probability variation state or a non-probability variation state. Whether or not there is, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, for the sudden hit, the control may be performed so as to shift to the probability changing state, the time reduction state, and the electric chew support control state (high accuracy high base state). When performing such control, it is not necessary to provide a small hit, and furthermore, control is performed to shift to the effect state indicating the high-accuracy base state without executing the above-described latent effect. May be.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 7100 does not notify that it is in a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the sudden hit big hit and after the end of the small hit gaming state. The latent effect control for performing a common effect is performed. By performing such latent effect control, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the player is in a probable change state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case of providing a “normal big hit” as in the present embodiment for the big hit of 15 rounds, the number of rounds is controlled to the same short-time state as that of the same probability variable big hit. It is difficult for players to recognize. Therefore, the above-described latent effect state may be controlled by performing a common effect that does not notify that the probability variation state is in the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. 5 also shows a payout control board 737, an effect control board 780, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 7560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to a program is mounted on the main board 731.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 755 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 757. In this embodiment, the ROM 754 and the RAM 755 are built in the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 755 in addition to the CPU 756, and the ROM 754 may be externally attached or incorporated. Further, the I / O port unit 757 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 754, so that the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. Random number circuit 7503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 7503 has a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection selection function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 7560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 7560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 754. The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 7503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 reads numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 7503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 713a or the second start port switch 714a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and effect symbol Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot display result. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 755 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (a special symbol process flag, the value of each reserved storage number counter, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 755 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 7560. A reset circuit that generates a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like is output during a period in which the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer in which the reset signal is at a low level. The operation stop signal for stopping the operation such as 7560 is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). Further, a clear signal (not shown) indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 758 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, and the count switch 746a to the game control microcomputer 7560 is also mounted on the main board 731. Has been. In addition, a solenoid 716 that opens and closes a variable winning ball device 715, a solenoid 721 that opens and closes a first special variable winning ball device 720 that forms a big winning opening, and a second special variable winning ball device 745 that forms a big winning opening. An output circuit 759 for driving the solenoid 747 for opening and closing according to a command from the game control microcomputer 7560 is also mounted on the main board 731. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 731.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 780 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777. An effect control command is received, and display control of an effect display device 709 that displays effect symbols in a variable manner is performed.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 777, the effect control board 780, the lamp driver board 735, and the audio output board 770. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 735 and the audio output board 770 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 735 and the audio output board 770, only the effect control board 780 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 780 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 7100 including an effect control CPU 7101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 780, the effect control CPU 7101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a signal from the main board 731 input via the relay board 777. In response to the (production control INT signal), the production control command is received via the input driver 7102 and the input port 7103. Further, the effect control CPU 7101 causes a VDP (video display processor) 7109 to perform display control of the effect display device 709 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 7109 that performs display control of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 7100 is mounted on the effect control board 780. The VDP 7109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 7100, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 7109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 709.

  The effect control CPU 7101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 709, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU 7101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 7109. The VDP 7109 executes display control based on data input from the effect control CPU 7101.

  The effect control board 780 is connected to a power supply circuit (not shown), and the effect control CPU 7101 of the effect control board 780 has a power supply monitoring function for monitoring that power is supplied from the power supply circuit.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 7102 on the effect control board 780. The input driver 7102 allows the signal input from the relay board 777 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 780 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 780 to the relay board 777). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The relay board 777 allows signal input from the main board 731 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 780 (no signal is passed in the direction from the effect control board 780 to the relay board 777). The unidirectional circuit 774 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 731 via the output port 7571 which is a unidirectional circuit, a signal from the relay board 777 to the inside of the main board 731 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 777 does not enter the inside of the main board 731 (the game control microcomputer 7560 side). The output port 7571 is a part of the I / O port unit 757 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 7571 (on the relay board 777 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 7101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 735 via the output port 7105. Further, the effect control CPU 7101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 770 via the output port 7104.

  In the lamp driver board 735, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 7352 via the input driver 7351. The LED driver 7352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 725 provided on the game board 706 side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 735.

  In the audio output board 770, the sound number data is input to the speech synthesis IC 7703 via the input driver 7702. The voice synthesizing IC 7703 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 7705. The amplifier circuit 7705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 7703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 7706 to the speakers 727R and 727L. The voice data ROM 7704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 700 will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 7560 on the main board 731. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 7560 (specifically, the CPU 756) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 756 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 756 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit)) (S4), the RAM is made accessible. Set (S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 756 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 756 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 756 executes normal initialization processing (S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 756 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  If it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 756 checks the data in the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 756 performs a game state restoration process (in S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 754 is set as a pointer (S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 755) (S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  In addition, the CPU 756 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (S43). Then, the process proceeds to S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 756 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 755 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 754 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Is set.

  The CPU 756 also initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 731 is mounted). An initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 7560 has executed initialization processing). (S13) is transmitted to the sub-board (S13). For example, when receiving the initialization designation command, the effect control microcomputer 7100 causes the effect display device 709 to display a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 756 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 7503 (S14). For example, the CPU 756 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 7503 to update the value of the random R.

  In S15, the CPU 756 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 7560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 756 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 7560 controls itself a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol (decorative symbol) that is variably displayed on the effect display device 709. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 7560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by lottery using a random number. However, it is the production control microcomputer 7100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 756 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when the CPU 756 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 756 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, and the count switch 746a are input via the input driver circuit 758, and the state determination is performed (switch) Process: S21).

  Next, the CPU 756 has a first special symbol display 708a, a second special symbol display 708b, a normal symbol display 710, a first special symbol hold storage display 718a, a second special symbol hold storage display 718b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 741 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 708a, the second special symbol display 708b, and the normal symbol display 710, a control for outputting a drive signal to each display in accordance with the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for normal symbol determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). The CPU 756 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 756 performs special symbol process processing (S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 708a, the second special symbol display 708b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 756 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 756 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 710 in a predetermined order. The CPU 756 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  In addition, CPU 756 performs a process of sending an effect control command to effect control microcomputer 7100 (effect control command control process: S28).

  Further, the CPU 756 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 756 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, and the count switch 746a (S30). Specifically, it is mounted on the payout control board 737 in response to winning detection based on one of the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, and the count switch 746a being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 797 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 756 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, CPU 756 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32). For example, if the start speed set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 756 will change every 0.2 seconds if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 756 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the second special symbol display 708b in the first special symbol display 708a and the second special symbol display 708b. 2 Executes the variable display of special symbols.

  Further, CPU 756 performs normal symbol display control processing for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of normal symbols in an output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol variation is set, the CPU 756 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the normal symbol variation rate every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 756 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 710 by outputting a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of S21 to S33 (excluding S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  If the first special symbol display device 708a or the second special symbol display device 708b and the effect display device 709 are shifted and stopped, the effect symbol change display state is changed after the effect symbol change display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variation display mode in a case where the variation display result is a loss symbol.

  If the first special symbol display device 708a or the second special symbol display device 708b and the effect display device 709 are shifted and stopped, the effect symbol change display state is changed after the effect symbol change display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 708a or the second special symbol indicator 708b, the reach effect is executed after the change display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas of the effect display device 709.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit and whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0.

(2) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, or sudden hit jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination)
(3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination).
(4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 5 (MR5): An initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining a random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types such as a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined, the big hit type is determined as one of these big hit types based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. When determining a variation pattern, first, a variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2). Then, one variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern type using a variation pattern determination random number (random 3).

  In this embodiment, when a normal big hit and a probable big hit, they are classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with normal reach and a fluctuation pattern type with super reach. Further, in the case of a sudden big hit, as in the big hit of 15 rounds, it is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with normal reach and a fluctuation pattern type with super reach. If it is a sudden hit, it is classified into a non-reach special variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a reach special variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. It may be divided. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined rate.

  In the case of outliers, a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve reach, a normal reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves normal reach, and a super reach variation that is a variation pattern type that involves super reach. They are classified into pattern types.

  In such a variation pattern type, when the display result is out of place, the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time-short state and the time-short state when not in the time-short state (compared to the time-short state and not the time-short state). Therefore, the rate of selection of variation pattern types with a short variation time such as normal variation pattern types is set to be high). , Fluctuation time is shortened. In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different depending on whether the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that displays variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. The variation time is shortened when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, compared to when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. Control for shortening the variable display time in this way is referred to as hold number reduction control.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 to be described later, as the setting of the variation pattern type, for example, for super reach, grouping by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, and variations without pseudo-continuations The variation pattern type of the first super reach to which the pattern belongs, the variation pattern type of the second super reach to which the variation pattern of one revariation belongs, and the variation pattern type of the third super reach to which the variation pattern of two revariations belong The variation pattern type of the fourth super reach to which the variation pattern of three re-variations belongs and the variation pattern type of the fifth super reach to which the variation patterns of four re-variations belong are classified. Note that, as a super reach, it is not necessary to use a reach effect that does not involve a pseudo-ream.

  As the setting of the variation pattern type, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, and a variation with first super reach (super reach A). The variation pattern type to which the pattern belongs, the variation pattern type including the variation pattern to which the second super reach (super reach B) belongs, and the variation pattern type including the variation pattern to which the third super reach (super reach C) belongs. You may make it divide. Regardless of whether it is a normal reach or a super reach, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of quasi-continuations, for example, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve quasi-continuations and re-variation It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of less than two times, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three re-variations, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of four re-variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a repetitive variation pattern such as a pseudo-ream.

  In S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 7, the game control microcomputer 7560 uses a counter for generating a big hit type determination random number (random 1) and a normal symbol determination random number (random 4). Count up (1 addition update). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, an example of using a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 7560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 7560) may be used as the jackpot determination random number. As shown, random numbers generated by software such as random numbers 1 to 5 may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 754 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 10 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The big hit judgment value set in the jackpot determination table at the time of probability change is the big hit judgment value common to the big hit judgment value set in the normal big hit judgment table (also called the first big hit judgment value), Is added, the number of jackpot determination values is larger (10 times the number) than the probability change jackpot determination table. As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  In the following description, out of the big hit judgment values set in the normal big hit judgment table and the probable change big hit judgment table, the normal big hit judgment value set in the normal big hit judgment table is the probability variation. It is also used as a common jackpot determination value in the hourly jackpot determination table, and is called a normal jackpot determination value (also referred to as a first jackpot determination value). Of the big hit judgment values set in the probability change big hit judgment table, the big hit judgment values (also referred to as second big hit judgment values) other than the normal big hit judgment value are the above-mentioned normal big hit judgment values during the probability change. It is used as a unique jackpot judgment value in addition to the judgment value, and is called a jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change.

  FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table stored in the ROM 754. The small hit determination tables include a normal (non-probable change) small hit determination table used for a small hit determination in a normal state and a probabilistic change small hit determination table used for a small hit determination in a positive change state. In the normal time small hit determination table, each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10B is set as the small hit determination value, and in the probability change small hit determination table, the right column of FIG. Each numerical value described in is set as a small hit judgment value. The small hit determination is performed by determining whether or not the value extracted from the random R matches the small hit determination value set according to the gaming state. When it is determined that they match, the small hit gaming state is controlled. As shown in FIG. 10 (B), the small hit determination value is set more for the probability change time than for the normal time.

  The numerical values described in FIGS. 10A and 10B are the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value. Hereinafter, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value corresponding to the value of the random R may be collectively expressed as a “hit determination value”. Further, the big hit determination and the small hit determination corresponding to the value of the random R may be collectively expressed as “hit determination”.

  The CPU 756 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 7503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches one of the big hit determination values shown, it is decided to make a big hit (normal big hit, probability variable big hit, or sudden big hit) for the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value does not match any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 10A, the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 10B. Then, decide to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that “probability” shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B indicates the probability (ratio) of big hit or small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 708a or the second special symbol display 708b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIGS. 10C and 10D are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 754. Of these, FIG. 10 (C) uses a reserved memory (also referred to as a first reserved memory) based on the game ball winning in the first start winning opening 713 (that is, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used when determining the jackpot type.

  Further, FIG. 10D shows the use of hold memory (also referred to as second hold memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 714 (that is, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). This is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used when determining the jackpot type.

  Each of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10 (C) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10 (D) is determined to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol. In addition, based on a random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type, to determine the big hit type as one of “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, or “surprising big hit” and to determine the big hit symbol It is a table that is referred to.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10C, there are numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value, and determinations corresponding to “normal jackpot”, “probable variation jackpot”, and “crash jackpot”. Value (big hit type judgment value) is set.

  In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10 (D), there are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, which are determination values corresponding to each of “normal jackpot” and “probability variable jackpot” (jackpot type determination) Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type judgment table, unlike the first special symbol jackpot type judgment table, a judgment value corresponding to “sudden big hit” is not set. Therefore, when the big hit is made based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, the big hit type of the “surprise big hit” is not selected, and there is no case where the “big hit big hit” is controlled. As a result, the type of jackpot controlled according to the variation display result is partially different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this way, by preventing the occurrence of a “big hit” in the variation display of the second special symbol, in the time-short state, the second start winning opening 714 provided with the variable winning ball device 715 is started. Since the frequency with which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after winning is increased, it is possible to increase the probability of being a big hit of 15 rounds, to improve the ball-out rate, and to improve the interest in the game. it can.

  Note that, as the second special symbol jackpot type determination table, a table that can also select “surprise big hit” as in the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may be used. In this case, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table is set to be lower in the second special symbol jackpot type determination table than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table. In this case, the same effect can be obtained as in the case where the “probable big hit” cannot be selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “normal jackpot” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “3” of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the “surprise big hit” is also set as a determination value corresponding to “5” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the big hit symbol.

  In this way, in each of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10C and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10D, a plurality of determination values are included in one jackpot symbol. It is associated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one determination value may be associated with one jackpot symbol. For example, if there are 100 symbols from “00” to “99”, for example, the big hit symbol “00” corresponds to the big hit symbol “00”, and the big hit symbol “99” is a big hit. The 100 jackpot type determination values “00” to “99” correspond one-to-one to the 100 jackpot symbols “00” to “99”, such that the type determination value “99” corresponds. You may do it.

  Using such a jackpot type jackpot type determination table, the CPU 756 determines a type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot type, and also matches the random 1 value as the jackpot symbol. Determine the winning jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10 (C) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10 (D), data is set in the following relationship.

  When comparing the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10 (C) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10 (D), the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 10 (D). The determination table is determined to have a higher ratio of 15 rounds of big hits (normal jackpot and probable big hit) than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. Thereby, the variable display of the second special symbol can perform the variable display which is advantageous for the player in that it is easier to acquire more prize balls than the variable display of the first special symbol. The reason is that in the big hit game state, the first special variable winning ball device 720 and the second special variable winning ball device 745 have more open balls in the big hit game state than in the big hit game state. This is because it is a big hit that allows more prize balls to be obtained. That is, since the big hit of 2 rounds is constituted by the hit where the prize ball cannot be obtained substantially, the big hit of 15 rounds can obtain more prize balls than the big hit of 2 rounds.

  Also, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10D is determined to be a probable big hit out of 15 rounds of jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10C. The ratio is high. As a result, the variation display of the second special symbol is more likely to be a 15-round probability variation big hit than the variation display of the first special symbol. In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table, the ratios determined for 15-round probability variation jackpots may be the same. In addition, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may be set to have a higher ratio determined for the 15th round probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

  Further, since the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10D is not selected, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10C is more than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table. However, there is a high ratio of selecting a promising big hit. For this reason, the variation display of the second special symbol has a higher ratio of determining the big hit of 15 rounds than the variation display of the first special symbol. As a result, for the start winning to the second start winning opening 714, a big hit of 15 rounds is likely to occur, and the entertainment of the game can be improved. In addition, about the 1st special symbol corresponding to the 1st start winning opening 713 in which the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is not provided, you may make it not allocate "surprise big hit" among big hit types. In that case, the ratio that the big hit type of “probable big hit” (“Burst big hit” is not selected) is selected for the first special symbol, and “probable big hit” and “crush big hit” are combined for the second special symbol. Setting is made so that the ratio of selecting the big hit type is equal. If it does in this way, it will become easy to generate | occur | produce a big hit of 15 rounds about the start winning to the 1st start winning opening 713, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first game that gives a predetermined amount of game value (for example, the number of rounds) as a big hit that is a specific gaming state that controls the gaming state to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A big hit of 15 rounds as a state (usually big hit, probable big hit) and a big hit of 2 rounds as a second gaming state that is disadvantageous than the first gaming state by giving a gaming value of an amount smaller than the gaming value ( In this example, the case of determining the (accurate big hit) is described. However, the game value given to the specific game state is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the second gaming state, the first gaming state may be determined in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value. . Further, for example, the first gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per one time during the big hit is increased as the gaming value as compared with the second gaming state. Also, for example, even if the same 15 rounds of big hit, a second gaming state where the big winning opening is opened once per round and a first gaming state where the big winning opening is opened multiple times per round are prepared. The game value in the first gaming state may be increased by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in the case of either the second gaming state or the first gaming state, when the grand prize opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds are finished in the second gaming state) However, in the case of the first gaming state, an undigested round remains), and an effect may be executed in such a way as to inquire whether or not the big hit continues further. And in the case of the second gaming state, since all 15 rounds have been finished internally, the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the first gaming state, there are still undigested rounds remaining internally. The jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the jackpot of the 15th opening). Thus, the relationship between the first gaming state and the second gaming state is that the second gaming state is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state due to the gaming value and the like given to the specific gaming state. Anything is acceptable.

  Next, a variation pattern of pseudo-variable variation display will be described. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a variation pattern of pseudo-variable variation display. FIG. 11 shows, as an example, a pseudo-continuous variation pattern in which re-variation is performed three times.

  In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, the start of variation display is the start of the first variation. Then, after one temporary stop is performed, the first re-variation is performed. At the time of temporary stop, the effect display device 709 temporarily stops the combination of temporary stop symbols forming the above-described pseudo consecutive chances. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, for example, temporary stop and re-variation are performed for the number of times set in the variation pattern, and at the end of the last re-variation, the effect display device 709 performs the above-described big hit determination or small variation. Depending on the determination result of the hit determination, the combination of the big hit symbol or the combination of the off symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (definite stop symbol). When the variation pattern is reach, the reach display is displayed on the effect display device 709 at the time of the last re-change, and the reach effect is performed. The reach effect may be performed at the time of re-variation other than the last re-variation.

  Next, a display example of variable display executed in the pachinko gaming machine 700 will be described. FIG. 12 is a display screen diagram illustrating a typical display example when super reach occurs in the effect display device 709 via a pseudo-ream. FIG. 12 shows an example in which, after the pseudo-variable display in which re-change is performed four times is executed, super reach is performed, and the display result of the change display becomes the jackpot display result.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is disclosed, in the effect display device 709, “left”, “middle” , “Right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R start changing the effect symbols, and the left, middle, and right effect symbol changes are started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (B), after the left, middle, and right effect symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect symbols start to change again as shown in FIG. 12 (C). Variation display by re-variation is executed. Here, the state in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed as a state in which the effect symbol swings on the spot and is not completely stopped as shown in FIG.

  After that, the temporary stop of the left, middle and right effect symbols as shown in FIG. 12D, the second re-variation of the pseudo-ream as shown in FIG. 12E, and the left and middle as shown in FIG. , The temporary stop of the right effect design, the third re-variation of the pseudo-ream as shown in FIG. 12G, the temporary stop of the left, middle, and right effect design as shown in FIG. 12H, and FIG. The fourth re-variation of the pseudo sequence as in (I) is performed.

  Then, after the left and right effect symbols stop at the same symbol as shown in FIG. 12 (J) and reach a reach state, a reach reach effect of super reach is executed as shown in FIG. When it is determined, as shown in FIG. 12K, the jackpot display result is derived and displayed as the final display result, and the display result is confirmed.

  The production mode from the start of the reach state as shown in FIG. 12 (J) to the execution of the super reach reach production as shown in FIG. 12 (K) is the development effect after re-variation, the development effect without re-variation, And, it is selected from a plurality of types of effects such as direct effects.

  The development effect after re-variation is an effect mode in which an effect of development is performed in which the effect of normal reach is executed from the reach state and the symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-changed to develop into the effect of super reach. Here, the effect of normal reach is a normal reach effect in which no effect other than the symbol variation display is performed. Further, the effect of super reach is an effect that makes it possible to specify that it is a super reach by performing an effect other than the symbol variation display. In addition, as an effect of normal reach, an effect other than the change display of symbols may be performed as long as the effect can be distinguished from the effect of super reach. In addition, as an effect of super reach, any effect may be performed as long as the effect can be distinguished from the effect of normal reach.

  The development effect without re-variation is an effect mode in which the effect of normal reach is executed, but thereafter, the temporary design of the effect symbol is not temporarily stopped and re-variation is performed, and the effect of development from the normal reach to the effect of super-reach is performed as it is.

  The direct effect is an effect mode in which an effect related to the development effect such as the normal reach effect and the re-variation is not performed, and the super reach effect is directly performed.

  FIG. 13 is a display screen diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode from the start of the reach state to the execution of the super reach reach effect in the effect display device 709.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, in the effect display device 709, in response to the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the symbol display areas 9L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. At 9C and 9R, the change display of the left, middle and right effect symbols is started. And it will be in a reach state like FIG.

  When the development effect without re-variation is selected, after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 13 (B1), the reach effect of normal reach is executed as shown in FIG. 13 (B2). Then, as shown in FIGS. 13 (C1) and 13 (D), a normal reach reach effect is continued as it is, and then a development effect such as the display of a character as shown in FIG. 14 described later is performed. The reach production of super reach like (E) is performed.

  Further, when the development effect after re-variation is selected, after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 13 (B1), the reach effect of the normal reach is executed as shown in FIG. 13 (B2). Then, after the reach-removed symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 13 (C2) or (C3), the intermediate effect symbol is changed again, and the reach state is set again as shown in FIG. 13 (D). Thereafter, a development effect such as displaying a character as shown in FIG. 14 is performed. For example, a reach effect of super reach as shown in FIG. 13E is performed. Thus, when the development effect after re-variation is executed, the symbol (medium effect symbol) temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 13 (C2) or (C3) is called a pre-development temporary stop symbol.

  Further, when the direct effect is selected, after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 13 (B1), as shown by the arrow in FIG. 13 (C4), the reach effect of the normal reach as shown in FIG. 13 (B2) is obtained. For example, a super-reach reach effect such as that shown in FIG. 13E is performed directly without performing a development effect such as displaying characters as shown in FIG.

  Also, for example, when it is determined to be off and normal reach is selected, after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 13 (B1), the reach effect of normal reach as shown in FIG. 13 (B2) is obtained. After the execution, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 13 (C5), the outlier display result is derived and displayed as the display result. When normal reach is selected in this way, only the reach reach effect of normal reach is executed as the reach effect, and the effect ends. It seems that the production mode is developed from the production of the normal reach to the production of the super reach.

  When it is determined that a normal big hit or a probable big hit is made, after reaching the reach of the super reach as shown in FIG. 13 (E), the big hit display result is displayed as a display result as shown in FIG. 13 (F1). Is derived and displayed. Further, when it is determined to be out of place, a super reach reach effect as shown in FIG. 13 (E) is performed, and as shown in FIG. 13 (F2), the reach is a combination of out of symbols. Outlier display results are derived and displayed. The reach effect shown in FIG. 13E is used as an effect that tells whether or not it will be a big hit in super reach.

  Further, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is made, after the reach of the super reach as shown in FIG. 13 (E) is performed, the combination of the out-of-reach symbols as shown in FIG. 13 (F3). After the off-line display result is temporarily stopped, the right effect design is replaced, and the display result of the chance is displayed as shown in FIG. 13 (F4). In this way, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is determined, the fluctuation display is performed in the reach state, and the display result of the chance eye is derived and displayed after the combination of the reach failure symbols is temporarily stopped. . The chances displayed as the display result when it is determined that the winning big hit or the small hit is determined, use a combination of out-of-reach symbols, or a symbol that is not displayed in the normal variation display as a medium effect symbol. You may make it display the combination of the symbol which was.

  FIG. 14 shows an example of the development mode of the effect when the effect display device 709 performs the effect such as the development effect without re-variation or the development effect after re-change when the super-reach A to C change display is performed. It is a display screen figure shown. In FIG. 14, the development mode of the production will be described by taking the case where the development production without re-variation is selected as a representative example.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, in response to the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the effect display device 709, the symbol display areas 9L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” At 9C and 9R, the change display of the left, middle and right effect symbols is started. And it will be in a reach state like FIG. The following effects are performed as effects unique to Super Reach A to C.

  In Super Reach A, an effect using the first character CH1 shown in FIGS. 14C1 and 14D1 is performed. In Super Reach B, an effect using the second character CH2 shown in FIGS. 14C2 and 14D2 is performed. In Super Reach C, an effect using the first character CH1 and the second character CH2 shown in FIGS. 14C3 and 14D3 is performed.

  When the development effect is performed in Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 14 (C1), after the first character CH1 appears and the first predetermined action based on the first story is performed, FIG. When the reach performance of the super reach using the first character CH1 as in D1) is performed, the super reach as shown in FIG. 14 (D1) is developed. The reach effect in FIG. 14 (C1) is used as an effect indicating that it will develop into Super Reach A, and the reach effect in FIG. 14 (D1) is used as an effect to indicate whether or not it will be a big hit in Super Reach A.

  When the development effect is performed in Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 14 (C2), after the second character CH2 is introduced and the second predetermined action based on the second story is performed, FIG. The reach of the super reach using the second character CH2 as in D2) is performed, so that the super reach as shown in FIG. 14 (D2) is developed. The reach effect in FIG. 14 (C2) is used as an effect indicating that it will develop into Super Reach B, and the reach effect in FIG. 14 (D2) is used as an effect to indicate whether or not it will be a big hit in Super Reach B.

  When the development effect is performed in Super Reach C, as shown in FIG. 14 (C3), the first character CH1 and the second character CH2 are introduced and the third predetermined action based on the third story is performed. Thereafter, the reach of the super reach using the first character CH1 and the second character CH2 as shown in FIG. 14 (D3) is performed, so that the super reach as shown in FIG. 14 (D3) is developed. The reach effect shown in FIG. 14 (C3) is used as an effect indicating that it will develop into a super reach C, and the reach effect shown in FIG. 14 (D3) is used as an effect that tells whether or not it will be a big hit in the super reach C.

  When the super reach A to C in which such an effect is performed is performed and the development effect without re-variation is performed, the reach effect of the normal reach is performed after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. After that, an image in which characters such as (C1) to (C3) appear without being re-varied is displayed. Further, when the development effect without re-variation is performed, after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 14B, the reach effect of the normal reach is performed, and then the effect symbols as shown in FIGS. 13C2 and 13C3. Changes again after the temporary stop, and an image in which characters such as (C1) to (C3) appear is displayed. Further, when direct performance is performed, after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 14B, an image in which characters such as (C1) to (C3) appear without displaying the reach of normal reach is displayed. Is done.

  As described above, the effect modes of the reach reach are different, for example, the effect modes of the super reach A to C are different in the character to be displayed.

  Next, a description will be given of the roaring effect performed as an effect as to whether or not to become a pseudo-ream before displaying a pseudo-ream chance when performing a pseudo-ream effect. FIG. 15 is a display screen diagram for explaining the roaring effect that is performed before displaying the pseudo-continuous chance in the effect display device 709.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, in response to the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the effect display device 709, the symbol display areas 9L for “left”, “middle”, “right” The left, middle and right effect symbols change display starts at 9C and 9R, and after the left effect symbol temporarily stops, the reach state is configured as shown in FIG. After temporarily stopping the right effect design to be performed, as shown in FIGS. 15 (B) to 15 (G), the squeak effect is provided as an effect to indicate whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect display is performed by the temporarily stopped right effect design. Executed.

  As for the production effect, as shown in FIGS. 15 (B) to 15 (G), the right production symbol is related to the temporarily produced left production symbol in the pseudo consecutive chance (in this example, “667”). The corresponding symbol (“7” in this example) and the symbol that does not correspond to the pseudo-continuous chance (“6” in this example) are alternately changed. When a variation pattern to be a pseudo-continuous is selected, a pseudo-continuous chance is displayed as shown in FIG. 15 (H), and a first re-variation display is displayed as shown in FIG. 15 (I). Do.

  In this manner, at the timing before the pseudo-run chance is displayed, after temporarily stopping the effect symbols constituting the reach state, it is asked whether or not the pseudo-ream effect display is performed by the temporarily stopped effect symbols. By performing the roaring effect, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the pseudo-ream and improve the interest of the game.

  In the case of performing such a roaring effect, for example, it is necessary to perform it at a timing before the pseudo consecutive chance eyes are displayed as shown in FIG.

  Further, such a roaring effect may be selected whenever a variation pattern that becomes a pseudo-continuous is selected in a variation pattern setting process (S301) described later, and the variation pattern that becomes a pseudo-continuous is selected. When this is done, a predetermined selection process (lottery process) may be performed to select at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate set based on whether or not a big hit is made).

  Further, such a roaring effect may be selected when a reach variation pattern is selected in a later-described variation pattern setting process (S301), and the reach variation pattern is selected. Sometimes, a predetermined selection process (lottery process) may be performed so as to be selected at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio set based on whether or not it is a big hit).

  In addition, when the re-variation of the quasi-continuous operation is repeated a plurality of times, such a roaring effect is determined at the start of the variable display by determining whether or not to perform the roaring effect for each re-variation. You may make it perform the said roaring effect at the time of execution of the re-variation decided to perform. In addition, in the case of such a roaring effect, when the re-variation of the pseudo-run is multiple times, before the start of each re-variation, it is determined whether to perform the roaring effect before each re-variation, Based on each decision, the turn effect may be performed at the time of execution of re-variation in which it is determined to perform the turn effect.

  In addition, such a stuttering effect is a variation in which a variation pattern that does not become a quasi-continuous and a variation pattern that becomes a quasi-continuous are provided, and when a variation pattern that becomes a quasi-continuous is selected, The selection ratio may be set higher than when the pattern is selected.

  Further, the above-described roaring effect may be performed without temporarily stopping the combination of effect symbols constituting the reach state as shown in FIG. In addition to the roaring effect shown in FIG. 15, the following effect is performed as an effect as to whether or not to become a pseudo-ream before performing the pseudo-ream chance display when performing the pseudo-ream effect. It may be. For example, after temporarily stopping the combination of the left and right effect symbols that make up the reach state, and by making a sliding display that slides the right effect design, configure the reach state and the combination of symbols that make up the chance sequence of the pseudo-ream You may make it perform the production | presentation which suggests which becomes the combination of the symbol to do. In addition, after temporarily stopping the combination of the left and right effect symbols that do not constitute the reach state, a display that replaces part or all of the left and right effect symbols is displayed, By alternately displaying a combination of symbols other than the pseudo-chance chances (or a combination of symbols constituting the reach state), it is suggested that a combination of symbols constituting the chances of the pseudo-ream is displayed. You may make it perform an effect. In addition, after temporarily stopping the combination of symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance, a combination of symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance and a combination of symbols other than the pseudo-continuous chance (reach) Display may be performed in a predetermined cycle, thereby providing an effect that suggests that the combination of symbols constituting the chance sequence of the pseudo-ream is displayed. In this way, as an effect as to whether or not to become a pseudo-ream performed before displaying a pseudo-ream chance when performing a pseudo-ream effect, if it is an effect that indicates whether or not to become a pseudo-ream, Any production may be performed.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 7560. In the example shown in FIG. 16, a command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol displayed in a variation manner on the effect display device 709 in response to the special symbol variation display. (Corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 7100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 709 controls the effect display device 709 to start displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command for designating that it is determined to be out of place. The command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command that designates that the jackpot is normally determined. Command 8C03 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the probability variation jackpot is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the winning hit is determined. Command 8C05 (H) is an effect control command for designating that a small hit is determined.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variable pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the effect symbol change display (change) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 7100 ends the effect symbol variation display (variation) and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 7560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise designates initialization. Send a command. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands (hit hit start designation command) for designating the start of the big hit game. The jackpot start designation command includes a plurality of commands such as a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, and a jackpot / rush start designation command, depending on the type of jackpot. The jackpot start 1 designation command is normally transmitted when designating the start of a jackpot gaming state of jackpot. The jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted in the case of designating the start of the jackpot gaming state with the probability variation jackpot. The small hit / surprise start designation command is transmitted when the start of the big hit gaming state of the small hit or the critical hit big hit is designated.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end 1 designation command) for designating the end of a normal jackpot jackpot gaming state. The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end 2 designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for the probability variation jackpot. The command A303 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end 3 designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state of the promising jackpot. Command A 304 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game state.

  The command A 401 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize designation command for designating that there is a start prize in which the first special symbol variation display is performed for the first start prize opening 713, that is, the first start prize has been given. ). The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize designation command for designating that there is a start prize in which the second special symbol variation display is performed for the second start prize opening 714, that is, the second start prize has been given. ).

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state). Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the time-short state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a probability change state.

  With such an effect control command, it is possible to notify the effect control microcomputer 7100 which state or combination of the game state is the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state. Thereby, in the production control microcomputer 7100, it is possible to recognize which state or combination of states among the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state, so that the normal state It is possible to perform various effects such as image display according to the time-short state and the probability variation state.

  Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number designation command) that designates the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

  The effect control microcomputer 7100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 7101) mounted on the effect control board 780 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 7560 mounted on the main board 731. Then, the display state of the effect display device 709 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 16, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 770.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 7560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and the variation display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 708a or the second special symbol display 708b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 7100.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 731 to the production control board 780 via the relay board 777 one byte at a time with eight parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 7100 mounted on the effect control board 780 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts an acquisition process of 1 byte data by an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the second special symbol display. An effect display device 709 that can be used in common with the change display (change) of the effect symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol in the device 708b, and that produces an effect in accordance with the change display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 7560 to the effect control microcomputer 7100 when controlling the effect parts such as.

  Next, the opening pattern data table stored in the ROM 754 will be described. In the opening pattern data table, for each of the big hits and small hits, the number of opening (number of rounds upper limit), opening time (opening time during each round), and interval time (time between each round) are included. Data indicating opening patterns of the first special variable winning ball device 720 and the second special variable winning ball device 745 is set.

  For example, for each of the big hits and the probable big hits, data that the number of releases is 15, the release time is 29 seconds, and the interval time is 5 seconds is set in the release pattern data table. In each of the big hit and the small hit, the number of times of opening is two, and data with an interval time of 0.5 seconds is set in the opening pattern data table.

  Note that the interval time may be set to be the same for the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit, and the sudden big hit. In addition, for a big hit that is easy to obtain a prize ball (for example, a normal big hit of 15 rounds, a probable big hit of 15 rounds) and a big hit that is difficult to obtain a prize ball (for example, a sudden big hit), the number of rounds per jackpot is a fixed number of rounds ( For example, 15 rounds) is set so that a long hit time at which a winning ball is easily obtained is set to a long opening time at which a winning ball is easily obtained, and an extremely short opening time at which a winning ball is hard to obtain a prize ball is set. It may be.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 7560 (specifically, the CPU 756) mounted on the main board 731.

  As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 708a or the second special symbol display 708b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 756 turns on the first start opening switch 713a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 713, and the first winning opening (713) Or the second start opening switch 714a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 714 is turned on and the start winning to the second starting winning opening 714 is made. When (second start winning) has occurred (S311), start port switch passing processing is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state. If the first start port switch 713a or the second start port switch 714a is not turned on, any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state without executing the start port switch passing process.

The processes of S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 7560 is in a state where the special symbol variable display can be started, the game control microcomputer 7560 stores the reserved symbol in the reserved memory buffer (the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in FIG. 19) corresponding to the special symbol for which the variable display is started. Confirm the number of stored numerical data (number of pending storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the hold storage number counter. If the count value of the reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. In addition, when it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit (whether it is a loss). In case of big hit, set big hit flag. If it is a small hit, the small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from the start of variation display until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation time of the special symbol variation display. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Display result designation command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 7100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol changing process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to S304. Update to the corresponding value (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display in the first special symbol display 708a or the second special symbol display 708b is stopped, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 7100 is performed. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (8 in this example). When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 7100 controls the effect display device 709 to stop the effect symbol and the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 7560 is received. When the big hit gaming state is a probable change state and the probability change flag is set, the probability change flag is reset (reset regardless of whether the big hit is a promiscuous big hit that is probable. ) Further, when the time-short flag is set in the big hit gaming state, or when the condition for ending the time-short state is satisfied based on the number of times of variable display, the time-short flag is reset.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 720 or the second special variable winning ball apparatus 745 is controlled to open the big prize opening according to the opening pattern as described above according to the type of the big hit. Do. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 721 or the solenoid 747 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S306 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-winner opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening pre-opening processing is also a process of starting the big hit gaming state.

  Large winning opening open process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during a big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 7100, and establishment of conditions for closing the big prize opening of the first special variable winning ball device 720 or the second special variable winning ball device 745 The process etc. which confirms are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. When all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 7100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, etc.) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the second special winning ball apparatus 745 is controlled to open the large winning opening in accordance with the small hit opening pattern as described above. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 747 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, a time for opening the special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S309 (9 in this example).

  Small hit release processing (S309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Control for transmitting the effect control command in the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 7100, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening of the second special winning ball device 745, etc. are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there is still the remaining number of open times, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (8 in this example). When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (S310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 7100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 713a and the second start port switch 714a is in the on state, the CPU 756 is turned on by the first start port switch 713a. Whether or not (S211). If the first start port switch 713a is on, the CPU 756 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether the number counter value is 4 or not is confirmed (S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S221.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 756 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S213).

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 19, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 755. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number ( Random 2) and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) are stored.

  Next, the CPU 756 extracts values from the random number circuit 7503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (S214). Specifically, in the process of S214, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) Is saved (stored). With regard to the following description regarding the hold storage, it may be indicated as “hold stored” that the information related to the start winning as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. The random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) is not extracted in the start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. It may be. For example, the game control microcomputer 7560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) in a variation pattern setting process described later. Good. Further, the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 7560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 756 performs control to transmit a first start winning designation command (S215). When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 7100, the CPU 756 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S29).

  If it is determined in S211 that the first start port switch is not in the ON state, if it is determined in S212 that the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, or a first start winning designation command is transmitted in S215. After performing the control, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the second start port switch 714a is turned on (S221). If the second start port switch 714a is on, the CPU 756 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 756 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 713a is on (see S211).

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 756 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S223). Next, the CPU 756 extracts values from the random number circuit 7503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of saving (storing) them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer (S224).

  Next, the CPU 756 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command (S225) and ends the process.

  In addition, you may implement | achieve the process of S213-S215 and the process of S223-S225 by one common routine. In that case, when the CPU 756 first detects that the first start port switch 713a is turned on, the CPU 756 sets data indicating “first” and the second start port switch 714a is turned on. When data is detected, data indicating “second” is set, and a common storage routine (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer) is selected or started according to the set data in the common routine A winning designation command (first starting winning designation command or second starting winning designation command) is selected.

  Next, a variation pattern table used to select and determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 7560 will be described with reference to FIGS. As the variation pattern table, the ROM 754 stores the first determination table when the normal state is shifted, the second determination table when the normal state is shifted, the first determination table when the short-time state is shifted, the second determination table when the short-time state is shifted, and the normal state probability change big hit time. Judgment table, short-time state accurate change big hit judgment table, normal state normal big hit judgment table, short-time normal big hit judgment table, normal state sudden big hit judgment table, short-time sudden big hit judgment table, normal state small hit judgment table In addition, a plurality of types of data tables such as a short time state small hitting time determination table are stored, and selectively used when a predetermined selection condition is established.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a first determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state and a second determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state. In the normal state deviation determination first determination table shown in FIG. 20 (a), it is determined to be out of the big hit determination in the normal state other than the short-time state, and the number of reserved memories (total pending) at the time of determining the variation pattern This is a variation pattern table that is used when the selection condition of the determination table is satisfied when the (memory number) is 1 to 4. In the normal state deviation determination second determination table shown in FIG. 20B, it is determined to be out of the big hit determination in the normal state other than the time reduction state, and the number of reserved memories (total number of reserved memories) is 5. It is a variation pattern table that is used when the selection condition of the determination table is satisfied when ˜8.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a first determination table at the time-short state deviation and a second determination table at the time-short state deviation. In the short-time state deviation determination first determination table shown in FIG. 21A, in the short-time state, it is determined to be out of jackpot determination, and the number of reserved memories (total number of reserved memories) at the time of determining the variation pattern is It is a variation pattern table that is used when the selection conditions of the determination table are satisfied when the number is 1-4. In the short-time state deviation determination second determination table shown in FIG. 21B, in the short-time state, it is determined to be out of the jackpot determination, and the number of reserved memories (total number of reserved memories) at the time of determining the variation pattern is It is a variation pattern table that is used when the selection condition of the determination table is satisfied when it is 5-8.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a normal state probability variation big hit determination table and a short time state probability variation big hit determination table. The normal state probability variable big hit determination table shown in FIG. 22 (a) satisfies the selection conditions of the determination table when it is determined that the probability change big hit is determined by the big hit determination and the big hit type determination in the normal state other than the short-time state. It is a fluctuation pattern table used as a result. The short-time state probability change big hit determination table shown in FIG. 22B is used when the selection condition of the determination table is established when it is determined to be a probable big hit by big hit determination and big hit type determination in the short time state. It is a fluctuation pattern table.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a normal state normal big hit determination table and a short time normal normal big hit determination table. In the normal state normal big hit determination table shown in FIG. 23A, the selection condition of the determination table is satisfied when it is determined that the normal big hit is determined by the big hit determination and the big hit type determination in the normal state other than the short-time state. It is a fluctuation pattern table used as a result. The short-time state normal big hit determination table shown in FIG. 23B is used when the normal hit condition is determined by the big hit determination and the big hit type determination in the short time state and the selection conditions of the determination table are satisfied. It is a fluctuation pattern table.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a normal state abrupt big hit determination table and a short time state abrupt big hit determination table. The normal state sudden hit big hit determination table shown in FIG. 24A satisfies the selection condition of the determination table when it is determined to be a hit big hit by the big hit determination and the big hit type determination in the normal state other than the short-time state. It is a fluctuation pattern table used as a result. The short-time state abrupt big hit determination table shown in FIG. 24B is used when the determination table selection condition is satisfied when it is determined that a big hit determination and a big hit type determination are made in the short-time state. It is a fluctuation pattern table.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a normal state small hit determination table and a short time small hit determination table. The normal state small hit determination table shown in FIG. 25A is a variation pattern table used when it is determined that the small hit is determined by the small hit determination in the normal state other than the short-time state. The short-time state small hitting time determination table shown in FIG. 25B is a variation pattern table used when the selection condition of the determination table is satisfied when it is determined that the small hitting is determined by the small hit determination in the short-time state. It is.

  Each of the tables shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 has a function as a variation pattern type determination table indicating a relationship between random 2 and variation pattern type, and a relationship between random 3 and variation patterns belonging to various types for each variation pattern type. It is the determination table which has a function as a fluctuation pattern determination table shown.

  In the variation pattern column in each table of FIGS. 20 to 25, “no quasi-continuation” is a variation pattern in which quasi-continuation is not performed. “Normal fluctuation” indicates a fluctuation display that does not become reach but shifts.

  “Normal reach” indicates a variation pattern for executing the above-described normal reach. “Super reach A” indicates a variation pattern for executing the effect of the super reach A described above. “Super Reach B” indicates a variation pattern for executing the effect of Super Reach B described above. “Super reach C” indicates a variation pattern for executing the effect of the super reach C described above.

  The “pseudo sequence once” is a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed once in the pseudo sequence. “Pseudo-continuous twice” is a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed twice in the pseudo-continuous. The “pseudo sequence 3 times” is a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed 3 times in the pseudo sequence. The “pseudo sequence 4 times” is a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed 4 times in the pseudo sequence. “No quasi-continuous” is a variation pattern in which the quasi-continuous variation is not displayed. “Out of” is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a “out of” display result. “Probability variation jackpot” is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display becomes the display result of “probability variation big hit”. “Normal jackpot” is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display becomes a display result of “ordinary jackpot”. The “accuracy big hit” is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “accuracy big hit”. “Small hit” is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display becomes a display result of “small hit”.

  Based on this information, for example, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-run once super-reach A losing” is displayed as “pseudo-run fluctuation display in which re-variation is executed once, and super-reason A is produced. After that, it is indicated that “the variation pattern of super reach resulting in a display error”.

  Next, the variation pattern type will be described. The variation patterns are classified into variation patterns of “normal”, “normal”, “first super”, “second super”, “third super”, “fourth super”, and “fifth super”. ing. The variation pattern type of “normal” includes a variation pattern for executing variation display of normal variation. The variation pattern type of “normal” includes a variation pattern that executes variation display of normal reach.

  The variation pattern type of “first super” includes a variation pattern that performs a super-reach variation display that does not execute pseudo-variable variation display. The variation pattern type of “second super” includes a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed once per pseudo-continuation and super-reaching variation display is performed. The variation pattern type of “third super” includes a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed twice in a pseudo-continuous manner and super reach variation display is performed. The variation pattern type of “fourth super” includes a variation pattern in which re-variation is executed three times in a pseudo sequence and variation display of super reach is performed. The variation pattern type of “fifth super” includes a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed four times in a pseudo sequence and variation display of super reach is performed.

  Next, the relationship between the lengths of fluctuation times in a plurality of fluctuation patterns will be described. The variation pattern in which the re-variation is performed in the pseudo sequence has a variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the variation display is not performed in the pseudo sequence. The length of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which the re-variation is performed in the pseudo-series is increased as the number of re-variations increases, such as 1 pseudo-series <2 pseudo-series <3 pseudo-series <4 pseudo-series. Is set to Further, normal fluctuations belonging to the “normal” fluctuation pattern type are “reach” such as “normal reach”, “super reach A” to “super reach C” (“normal”, “first super” to “ The variation time is set to be shorter than the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern type “5th super”). Further, the variation patterns belonging to “first super” to “fifth super” which are variation types of “super reach” such as “super reach A” to “super reach C” are “normal reach” such as “normal reach”. The variation time is generally set longer than the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern type “normal”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 20 to 25, the fields “Random 2 Range” and “Variation Pattern Type” are the variation pattern type determination table section indicating the relationship between “Random 2 Range” and “Variation Pattern Type”. It is a column which shows the function as. For example, taking FIG. 20A as an example, “normal”, “normal”, “first super”, “second super”, “third super”, “fourth super”, “fifth super” For each of the plurality of variation pattern types, all the values of random 2 (1 to 400) are represented by a numerical range indicated by “225-325”, a numerical range indicated by “326-350”, “351- The numerical value range is indicated by “370”, the numerical value range indicated by “371-385”, the numerical value range indicated by “386-395”, and the numerical value range indicated by “396-400”. For example, if the random 2 value extracted at a predetermined timing matches any numerical value in the numerical range indicated by “326 to 350”, it is determined that the variation pattern type is “first super”.

  In the first determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state in FIG. 20A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the second determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state in FIG. 20B, the relationship between the “random 2 range” and the “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the first determination table at the time shortage state deviation of FIG. 21A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the second determination table at the time shortage state deviation in FIG. 21B, the relationship between the “random 2 range” and the “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG.

  In the normal state probability variation jackpot determination table of FIG. 22A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the time-short state probability variation jackpot determination table of FIG. 22B, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. 22B. In the normal state normal jackpot determination table of FIG. 23A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the time-short state normal jackpot determination table of FIG. 23B, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG.

  In the normal state abrupt big hit determination table of FIG. 24A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the short-time state big hit determination table of FIG. 24B, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the normal state small hit determination table of FIG. 25A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the short-time state small hit big hit determination table of FIG. 25B, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG.

  Also, in each table of FIGS. 20 to 25, the columns labeled “Random 3 Range” and “Variation Pattern” are variation pattern determination tables indicating the relationship between “Random 3 Range” and “Variation Pattern”. It is a column indicating a part. The variation pattern shown corresponding to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table section is a variation pattern belonging to each variation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 20 (a) as an example, the fluctuation patterns belonging to the type of “normal” are “no pseudo-continuous normal reach out”, “pseudo continuous once normal reach out”, “pseudo continuous twice normal reach out”, And “Pseudo-ream 3 times normal reach off”. All values of random 3 (0 to 121) are allocated to a plurality of numerical ranges in each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type. For example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “first super” is selected, “no pseudo-reach normal reach out”, “pseudo-ream once normal reach out” according to the random 3 value extracted at a predetermined timing. ”,“ Pseudo-continuous 2 times normal reach out ”or“ Pseudo-continuous 3 times normal reach out ”variation pattern is selected and determined.

  Note that, as the variation pattern type, for example, a plurality of types of “normal reach” variation patterns with different effects may be provided, and “normal reach” may be divided into a plurality of variation pattern types according to the number of pseudo-variations. Further, the variation pattern of “super reach” may be divided into a plurality of variation pattern types depending on the types of effects of super reach A to C, not the number of re-variations of the pseudo-continuous.

  20 to 25, the variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time-short state and the time-short state. For example, when the time is lost, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variation time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is set higher in the time reduction state than in the time reduction state. Also, when a big hit is made, the rate of selection of a variation pattern type with a short variation time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is set higher in the time reduction state than in the time reduction state. As a result, when the time is short, the variation time is shortened compared to when the time is not short.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b) and FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the variation pattern type is when the number of reserved symbols stored in a special symbol is a predetermined number or more, The selection ratio is set to be different when the number is less than the predetermined number. Specifically, in each of FIGS. 20 (a) and (b) and FIGS. 21 (a) and (b), the number of reserved storages as shown in FIGS. 20 (b) and 21 (b) is a predetermined number. When this is the case, as shown in FIG. 20A and FIG. 21A, the ratio of selecting the “normal” variation pattern type is set higher than when the number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number. . Thereby, when the number of reserved memories of the special symbol is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variation time is shortened compared to the case where the number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number. Control for shortening the variable display time in this way is referred to as hold number reduction control.

  20 and FIG. 21, the threshold value of the number of reserved memories when the ratio of determining the variation pattern type is changed according to the number of reserved memories at the time of determining the variation pattern (for example, the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more) The predetermined value when the table is made different, for example, a value such as the reserved storage number “5” which is a threshold for selecting the table in FIGS. 20 and 21) is made different according to the gaming state. Also good. For example, for a table that lowers the ratio of determining a variation pattern type with a long variation time when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the number of reserved memories smaller than that in the non-probable variation state is the threshold value in the probability variation state. You may set as follows.

  Further, as the tables used when changing the rate of determining the variation pattern type in accordance with the number of reserved storage at the time of determining the variation pattern as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, “1”, “2”, “3” ... A table is provided for each one of the reserved storage numbers, such that the rate of determining the variation pattern type varies depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, the larger the number of reserved memories, the longer the variation time. It is also possible to use a table in which data is set so that the rate of determination as the variation pattern type becomes low. Specifically, the data may be set so that the number of determination values for determining the variation pattern type varies depending on the number of reserved storage.

  20 to 25, when there is a discrepancy, “no quasi-continuous”> “1 quasi-continuous”> “2 quasi-continuous”> “3 quasi-continuous”> “4 quasi-continuous” The ratio of the size is set. On the other hand, when the probable big hit and the normal big hit, the ratio of “no quasi-continuous” <“one quasi-continuous” <“two quasi-continuous” <“three quasi-continuous” <“four quasi-continuous” Relationship is set. As a result, when the probability change big hit and the normal big hit, the ratio of the variable display that becomes a pseudo-continuous is higher than the case of the loss, so when the variable display that becomes the pseudo-continuous is performed, Expectation can be raised. Furthermore, when the probability big hit and the normal big hit are set, the rate of selection of the fluctuation pattern with a large number of re-variations in the quasi-continuous is set to be higher than when it is out of place. When the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream increases, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot can be increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, when the probability variation big hit is set, the rate at which the fluctuating display that becomes a pseudo-continuous is performed is set higher than when the normal big hit. Thereby, when the fluctuation display which becomes a quasi-ream is performed, the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced. Also, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, when the probability variation big hit is set, the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern having a large number of re-variations in the quasi-continuous is selected is higher than when the normal big hit is achieved. Therefore, when the variation display is performed, the more the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream, the higher the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit.

  Also, in the respective tables of FIGS. 20 to 25, when they are out of place, a magnitude relationship of “normal fluctuation”> “normal reach”> “super reach A” to “super reach C” is set. . On the other hand, when a big hit is made, a ratio relationship of “normal reach” <“super reach A” to “super reach C” is set, and any of the super reach A to C is compared with the case of a loss. There is a high proportion of the variable display that performs the above. As a result, when a big hit is made, the percentage of the variable display that reaches the reach state is higher than when the big hit, so when the variable display that reaches the reach state is performed, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit is increased. be able to. Furthermore, since the ratio of the super reach A to C being performed is higher in the variation display that reaches the reach state when the big hit is made, the variation display that becomes the super reach is performed. , It is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  20 and FIG. 21 are compared with FIGS. 22 to 24, when the super reach is out of sync, the ratio of super reach A is generally selected is high, and the super reach A is simulated. The smaller the number of re-variations, the higher the selected ratio. On the other hand, when the super reach is a big hit (including a probable big hit, a normal big hit, and a sudden big hit), the overall ratio of the super reach C is high. As the number of times increases, the selection ratio is set higher.

  As a result, when the variable display for super reach C is executed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the variable display for super reach A is executed. When it becomes C, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be further increased.

  20 and FIG. 21 are compared with FIGS. 22 to 24, when the super reach is out of proportion, the ratio of the super reach A is generally higher than the super reach B, and The rate at which super reach B is selected is higher than super reach C. The super reach B is set so that the selected ratio increases as the number of times of re-variation of the pseudo-ream increases. On the other hand, when the super reach is a big hit (including a probable big hit, a normal big hit, and a sudden big hit), the overall ratio of the super reach C is higher than that of the super reach B, and more than the super reach A. However, the ratio of Super Reach B being selected is high. The super reach B is set so that the selected ratio decreases as the number of times of re-variation of the pseudo-ream increases.

  As a result, when the variable display for super reach B is executed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the variable display for super reach A is executed. When it becomes B, although it is not as much as Super Reach C, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be enhanced.

  22 and FIG. 23 are compared with FIG. 24, and when it is a sudden big hit (the same is true when it is a small hit), it fluctuates in a pseudo-continuous manner compared to when it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit. When the display is performed, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-variations is set to be high. As a result, when the fluctuation display is performed in the quasi-continuous, when the number of re-variations in the quasi-continuous is small, the ratio of sudden hits is higher than when the number of re-variations in the quasi-continuous is large. When the change display is performed, even if the number of re-changes is small, the player can have a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the probability change state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, comparing FIG. 24 with FIG. 25, regarding the super reach, the ratio of the super reach that is selected with a high ratio depending on the number of re-variations of the quasi-ream, when it is a sudden big hit and when it is a small hit. Different types. For example, when the number of re-variations of the pseudo-series is one, the ratio of super reach B being selected is high when sudden hit is large, and the ratio of super reach C being selected is high when small hit. As described above, in the variation pattern in which pseudo-series re-variation is performed as in Super Reach B, even if the same super reach is used, if the number of re-variations of the pseudo-series is small, control that is likely to be sudden hit (surprise big hit) (The control with a high ratio) is performed. When the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream is 2 to 4, the ratio of selecting the super reach C is high when it is a big hit and the ratio of selecting the super reach B is high when it is a small hit. . Thus, the player can estimate whether the probability of the big hit or the small hit is high based on the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream and the type of super reach displayed. For this reason, even if the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream is small, the player's attention can be drawn. In order to guess whether a player is likely to be a sudden big hit or a small hit based on the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream and the type of super reach displayed, instead of super reach C, In addition, Super Reach may be used in addition to Super Reach A. For example, when the number of re-variations of the quasi-ream is one, the ratio of super-reach B is selected when it is a sudden big hit, and the percentage of super-reach A is selected when it is a small hit. When the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream is 2 to 4, increase the ratio of selecting the super reach A when the big hit is made and increase the ratio of selecting the super reach B when the small hit is made. Make it high.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 756 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (see FIG. 19) (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 756 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is stored data in the second reserved memory buffer, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating “second” is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a is set according to whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. And the second special symbol display in the second special symbol display 708b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display unit 708a performs the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. It is. On the other hand, when data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 708b is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer. Is done.

  Here, the “common processing routine” is a program for realizing a specific series of processes, and in this embodiment, a series for performing variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It points to the program for realizing the process. In this embodiment, the “common processing routine” includes the processing of S55 to S76 in the special symbol normal processing described later, the variation pattern setting processing of S301, the display result specifying command transmission processing of S302, and the special symbol variation of S303. The process and the special symbol stop process of S304 are included.

  If there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer under the control of S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol display 708b based on the second reserved memory data is It is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol display 708a based on the data in the first reserved memory.

  Thus, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. Thereby, the following effects can be obtained. During a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, the time-shortening control is performed, so that it becomes easy for the variable winning ball device 715 to win a game ball at the second start winning port 714. Therefore, during the predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, the data in the second reserved memory is more likely to be generated than at other times. When the reserved storage data is stored in both the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, the second reserved storage is more effective than the variable display of the first special symbol display 708a based on the first reserved storage data. Since the variation display of the second special symbol display 708b based on the data is executed with priority, it is possible to efficiently process the stored data that is likely to be generated in the short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Occurrence of start winnings (starting conditions) that cannot be stored as the second reserved memory and become invalid due to the limitation by the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number can be reduced. Thereby, the execution efficiency of the variable display of the second special symbol display 708b in the time-saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state can be improved.

  Next, the CPU 756 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 755 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 755 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 756 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Are stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 755. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 756 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 755.

  Then, the CPU 756 decrements the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 756 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 756 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 755. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 755. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Further, the CPU 756 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 7100 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (S59). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 756 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number designation command. When a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 756 performs control to transmit the second reserved storage number designation command.

  In the effect control microcomputer 7100, a first reserved memory number storage area for storing a first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command when the first reserved memory number designation command is received, and a second reserved memory There is provided a second reserved memory number storage area for storing the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command when the memory number designation command is received. The production control microcomputer 7100 updates the data of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area every time the first reserved memory number designation command is received, thereby obtaining the latest first reserved memory. Each time the second reserved memory number designation command is received, the latest second reserved memory number is recognized by updating the data of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area. To do.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 713, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special winning opening 714. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S307 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 756 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes a jackpot determination module (S60). In this case, the CPU 756 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in S214 of the start port switch passing process or S224 of the start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and determines the big hit To do. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 10A in the ROM 754 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 10A in the ROM 754 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 756 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. In the idle state or the short time state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining big hit (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. If it is determined to be a big hit (S60), the process proceeds to S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, the probability variation flag is determined to be a normal big hit, a probability big hit, or a sudden big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and then the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times). And the condition that the next jackpot is determined, whichever comes first, is reset at the timing when the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in S60), the small hit determination module that performs the small hit determination using the big hit determination random number extracted in S60 Is executed (S61). The small hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined small hit determination value (see FIG. 10) with a big hit determination random number and executes a process of determining a small hit when they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the small hit determination process.

  In the small hit determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability that a small hit will be higher than when the gaming state is a non-probable change state (normal game state and short time state). It is configured. Specifically, a probability change time small hit determination table (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 10B in the ROM 754 is set) in which a large number of small hit determination values are set in advance, and the small hit determination value There is provided a normal small hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 10B in the ROM 754 are set) in which the number is set to be smaller than the probability change small hit determination table. Then, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state. If the gaming state is a probable change state, the CPU 756 performs a small hit determination process using the probability change small hit determination table. Is in the normal state (non-probability change state), the processing for determining the small hit is performed using the normal small hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 10B, the CPU 756 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. If it is determined to be a small hit (S61Y), a small hit flag is set (S62), and the process proceeds to S75. If it is decided not to make a small hit (S61N), the process proceeds to S75. Note that determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but determining whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol display a small hit symbol It is also to do.

  With regard to the small hit, the probability of determining a small hit in the probability variation state may not be made higher than that in the normal state, and it may be determined to always be a small hit with a fixed determination probability. Regarding the small hit, the probability that the variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are smaller than the variation display of the first special symbol in the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. The probability of performing the determination as a small hit may be varied so as to lower the value.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values in S60, the CPU 756 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (S71). Then, as tables used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10C and the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 10D One of the determination tables is selected (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 756 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG.

  Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 756 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 756 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted in S214 of the start port switch passing process or S224 of the start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and selected in S72. Using the jackpot type determination table, the jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined (S73). Further, in this case, as shown in FIG. 10D, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, 15 rounds are compared with the case where the variable display of the first separate symbol is executed. The ratio of big hits (usually big hits and probable big hits) is high.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (D), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type. Since the symbols are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the game control corresponding to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  The CPU 756 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 755 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type. When the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “surprise big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 756 sets a special symbol stop symbol (S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” as a special symbol is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in S73 is set as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the big hit type is determined as “probability big hit”, “3” is set as the special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined to be “probable big hit”, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined to be “successful big hit”, “5” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “1” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process.

  In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91). When the big hit flag is set, it is determined that the big hit is made, and the CPU 756 is in the big hit type information stored in S74, the non-short-time state or the short-time state. As described above, the table is used to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern according to the time-shortening information indicating the probability variation information indicating the current state (non-probability variation state) or probability variation state. Based on the selection conditions of the judgment table, the normal state probability variation big hit judgment table, the short time state certain variation big hit judgment table, the normal state normal big hit judgment table, the short time normal big hit judgment table, the normal state sudden hit big hit judgment table, and Then, any one of the time-short state sudden probability big hit determination table is selected (S92). Then, the process proceeds to S114.

  Here, the time reduction information is information indicating whether or not the time reduction state is present. The time reduction information indicates that the time reduction state is set when the time reduction flag is set, and the non-time reduction state is indicated when the time reduction flag is not set. The probability variation information is information indicating whether or not the probability variation state is present. The probability variation information indicates that the probability variation state is set when the probability variation flag is set, and indicates that the probability variation state is not established when the probability variation flag is not set. In this embodiment, the case where the data indicating the time reduction information and the data of the time reduction flag are separately provided is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the data of the time reduction flag may be used as it is as the time reduction state. . In this embodiment, the data indicating the probability variation information and the data of the probability variation flag are separately provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the data of the probability variation flag may be used as it is as the probability variation state. .

  When the big hit flag is not set in S91, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S93). When the small hit flag is set, it is when it is determined that the small hit is made, and the CPU 756 uses the table used for determining the variation pattern type and the variation pattern according to the above-mentioned time reduction information. Based on the table selection conditions described above, either the normal state small hit determination table or the short time short hit determination table is selected (S92). Then, the process proceeds to S114.

  If the small hit flag is not set in S93, it is a time when it is determined to be out of accord with the erasure judgment, and the CPU 756 stores the above-mentioned time-shortening information and the total pending storage number information (the above-mentioned first pending storage number information). Information obtained by adding together the first reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area), and the variation pattern type and Based on the table selection conditions described above, the table used for determining the variation pattern is the first determination table when the normal state is shifted, the second determination table when the normal state is shifted, the first determination table when the time-short state is shifted, and Then, any one of the second determination tables at the time-short state deviation is selected (S95). Proceed to S114.

  Next, in S114, the CPU 756 reads random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the determination table selected in the processing of S92, S94, or S95. The variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the data of the variation pattern type determination table in (S114).

  Next, the CPU 756 reads random 3 (variation pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (first reservation storage buffer or second reservation storage buffer), and in the determination table selected in the processing of S92, S94 or S95, the variation pattern By referring to the data related to the variation pattern type determined in S114 in the determination table unit, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (S115).

  In the case where the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 756 has a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). The value may be directly extracted from the data, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Further, when random number 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize and the variation pattern type is determined in S114, a value is obtained from the random number counter for variation pattern type determination for generating random 2. The variation pattern type may be determined by direct extraction and based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 7100 (S116).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (S117). For example, by setting a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32, the first special symbol display unit 708a or the second special symbol display unit 708b performs the variable display as described above. Let it begin. When the data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display unit 708a starts the variable display of the first special symbol, and the data indicating “second” in the special symbol pointer. Is set, the second special symbol display unit 708b starts the variable display of the second special symbol. In the special symbol display control process of S32, the display of the special symbol is started with reference to the process state of the special symbol process instead of starting the display of the special symbol with reference to the start flag. You may do it. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 755 (S118). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (S302) (S119).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, the variation pattern type may be determined based on the determination result of whether or not to reach. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result, The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In the display result designation command transmission process (S302) described above, the CPU 756 performs any effect control command (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation command) according to the determined type of big hit or loss. (See FIG. 16).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 756 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (S125), and when the variable time timer times out (S126), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S304). Update (S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 756 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the special symbol variation display, and the first special symbol display unit 708a or the second special symbol display unit 708b. In step S131, the stop symbol is derived and displayed. If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b is terminated. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control microcomputer 7100 (S132). Thereby, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 7100 in S28 of FIG. If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 756 resets the probability variation flag and the hourly flag (S134), and causes the effect control microcomputer 7100 to send a big hit start 1 designation command according to the determined hit type, Either the big hit start 2 designation command or the small hit / attack start designation command (big hit start designation command) is set (S135).

  Thereby, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 7100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of jackpot is normally jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is a sudden big hit, a small hit / rush start designation command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is a normal big hit, a probable big hit or a sudden big hit is determined based on data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 755 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Also, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 709) is set in the big prize opening control timer (S136). Thereafter, in the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the big winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and a round is started.

  In addition, according to the big hit type specified by the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 755, the release pattern data stored in the ROM 754 is referred to, and the number of releases (for example, the normal big hit and the probability change). 15 times for big hits, 2 times for sudden big hits), open time (for example, 29 seconds for normal big hits and probable big hits, 0.5 seconds for big hits), between rounds The data indicating the release mode such as the interval time (for example, 5 seconds for normal big hit and probability big hit, 0.5 seconds for sudden big hit) is set in a predetermined storage area (S137). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) (S138).

  Note that when the number of rounds is the same for both the normal big hit and the probability big hit and the sudden big hit, a fixed value (for example, 15 times) may be used as the number of open times set in S137. The process for setting the number of times the state is released can be simplified.

  In S139, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (S139). If the time reduction flag is set, it is checked whether or not a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is set (S139A). When the probability change flag is not set, it is in a non-probability change state and a short-time state, that is, a short-time state after the end of the normal big hit game state.

  It is necessary to continue the time-saving state after the end of the big hit game state, which is a normal big hit, until either one of the conditions of the variable display is executed 100 times or the next big hit occurs. Such a continuation period of 100 display times is managed by updating a short time counter that indicates the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the short time state by the special symbol stop process each time the variable display is executed. In order to perform such management, when it is determined in S139A that the probability variation flag is not set, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (S140). As will be described later, the hourly / counter counter is set to a value (100) corresponding to a predetermined number (100 times) in the big hit end processing (S307) at the end of the normal big hit big hit gaming state.

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (S141). If the value of the time reduction counter has become 0, it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state after the normal big hit has ended. The time reduction flag is reset (S142). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state (non-short-time state). Then, the CPU 756 sets a normal state designation command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 7100 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the short-time state to the normal state (non-short-time state) (S143), and proceeds to S144. Thus, the normal state designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 7100 in S28 of FIG.

  If the time reduction flag is not set in S139, or if the probability variation flag is set in S139A, it does not correspond to the time reduction state after the end of the big hit, so the process proceeds to S144. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in S141, the time reduction state is continued, and the process proceeds to S144 as it is.

  In S144, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S144). If the small hit flag is set, the small hit / rush start designation command transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 7100 is set (S145). Thereby, the small hit / probability start designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 7100 in S28 of FIG. Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 709) is set in the special winning opening control timer (S146). Thereafter, in the pre-start process for small hits, the big prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big prize opening starts to be opened.

  Further, referring to the release pattern data stored in the ROM 754, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times), the opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the interval time between rounds (for example, for example) (0.5 seconds) or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (S147). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S308) (S148). If the small hit flag is not set in S144, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S149).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (S305). In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the CPU 756 decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer by −1 (S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated. As a result, at the start of the big hit gaming state, the big hit display time set as described above is reached until the value of the big prize opening control timer becomes zero, so control for notifying that a big hit has occurred is performed. It is. In addition, during the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the interval time set in S440, which will be described later, is used until the value of the big prize opening control timer becomes 0. Done.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 756 causes the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) to designate the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 7100 (S403). The CPU 756 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 756 controls the solenoid 721 or the solenoid 747 to open the large winning opening (the first special variable winning ball device 720 or the second special variable winning ball device 745) (S404), and the opening number counter The value of -1 is decreased by 1 (S405).

In addition, the value corresponding to the opening time of the round based on the opening pattern data corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in the winning prize control timer as a value corresponding to the maximum time that the winning prize opening can be opened in each round. (S406). As the opening time of the round, the opening time data set in S137 is set. For example, the release time is set to 29 seconds for a normal big hit and a probable big hit, and the release time is set to 0.5 seconds for a sudden big hit. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (S306) (S407).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (S306) in the special symbol process. In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 756 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by -1 (S420).

  Then, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (S421). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is checked whether the count switch 723 or the count switch 746a is turned on (S432). If the count switch 723 and the count switch 746a are not turned on, the processing Exit. When the count switch 723 or the count switch 746a is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by one (S433). Then, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the prize winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 756 controls to drive the solenoid 721 or the solenoid 747 to close the big prize opening. Perform (S435). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (S436).

  Next, the CPU 756 confirms the value of the opening number counter (S438). When the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0, the CPU 756 designates the post-big prize opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the round is completed). ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 7100 (S439). Then, a value corresponding to the interval time from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer (S440). Specifically, specifically, the interval time data set in S137 is set as the interval time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (S305) (S441).

  On the other hand, when the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0, the CPU 756 performs control for transmitting a big hit end command corresponding to the big hit type to the effect control microcomputer 7100 (S442). Specifically, in S442, the jackpot type is confirmed based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 755. Then, the CPU 756 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (time for notifying that the jackpot game has ended, for example, in the effect display device 709) in the jackpot control timer (S443), and the value of the special symbol process flag Is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S307) (S444), and the process ends.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 756 subtracts 1 from the value of the big winning opening control timer in which the big hit end time is set (S154). Then, the CPU 756 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (S155). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit type is a probability big hit or a sudden big hit (S158).

  When the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden big hit, a probability change flag is set (S159) and the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot is a sudden jackpot (S160). When the big hit type is a sudden big hit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S164), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the type of big hit is not a sudden big hit (when it is a probable big hit), the process proceeds to S161. If the big hit type is not a probable big hit or a sudden big hit in S158 (usually a big hit), the process proceeds to S161. As a result, the process proceeds to S161 when the big hit type is a normal big hit or a probable big hit.

  In S161, a time reduction flag is set (S161). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation flag is set (S161A). When the probability variation flag is not set, it is the end of the normal big hit game state according to the erasure method, and for example, 100 is set in the hourly number counter (S162), and the process proceeds to S163. As a result, after the end of the normal big hit game state, the time display is continuously controlled until the variable display is executed 100 times. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is set, it is the end of the big hit gaming state of the probability change big hit according to the elimination method, and the process proceeds to S163 as it is. As a result, at the time of a probable big hit, it is not limited to the number of executions of the variable display, and is controlled to the time-saving state continuously until the next big hit. In S163, the CPU 756 performs a process for transmitting a time reduction state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 7100 (S163). As a result, a time reduction state designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 7100. Next, the CPU 756 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S164), and ends the process.

  Although the timers and flags to be handled are different, the small hit pre-release process in S308 is the same as the pre-big hit release process in S305, and the small hit open process in S309 is the same process as the mid-round process in S306. The small hit end process in S310 is the same process as the big hit end process in S307. However, unlike the case of the big hit end process, the probability change flag and the hourly flag are not set in the small hit end process. Therefore, at the small hit, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not set / reset.

  As described above, when the time-short state is entered, the time-short state designation command is transmitted so that the effect control microcomputer 7100 can recognize the time-short state.

  Next, the normal symbol display result determination table used for determining the display result of the normal symbol will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol display result determination table. The normal symbol display result determination table is stored in the ROM 754.

  In the normal symbol display result determination table, the random 4 (1-201) value (determined value) for normal symbol determination, the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol variation time, and the variable winning ball apparatus 715 ( The relationship between the opening time and the number of times the second start winning opening 714) is shown is divided into a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the electric chew support control is not performed) and an electric chew support control state.

  In the normal gaming state, when the determined value is any of 1 to 20, the display result of the normal symbol is taken as a hit, the variation time is set to 10 seconds, and the release time is once in 0.3 seconds. Set to open. On the other hand, when the determined value is any of 21 to 201 in the normal gaming state, the display result of the normal symbol is disregarded, and the variation time is set to 10 seconds.

  In addition, when the determined value is any of 1 to 180 in the electric chew support control state, the display result of the normal symbol is taken as a hit, the variation time is set to 1 second, and the release time is 1.5. Set to open 3 times per second. On the other hand, when the determined value is any of 181 to 201 in the electric chew support control state, the display result of the normal symbol is disregarded, and the variation time is set to 1 second.

  Thus, regarding the control of the normal symbol, in the electric chew support control state, compared with the normal gaming state, the determined value is set to be higher, the variation time is set to be shorter, Further, the opening time and the number of opening times are set to increase.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in S27 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 756 first checks whether the detection signal from the gate switch 732a provided in the gate 732 is in an on state, thereby detecting whether or not a game ball that has passed through the gate 732 has been detected. It is determined whether or not (S501). In S501, when the game ball passes through the gate 732 and the detection signal from the gate switch 732a is turned on for a predetermined period, it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate (passed ball), Processing at the time of passing through the gate is executed (S502).

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in S502, the following process is executed. First, whether or not the number of the general-purpose reserved storage, which is the number of the general-purpose reserved storage data stored in the general-purpose reserved storage unit provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 755, is a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). Determine whether or not. The usual figure holding storage unit holds up to four random number numerical data for determining the display result of the normal symbol extracted when the gate pass of the game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a as the usual figure holding storage data. It has a data storage area for storing. This ordinary reserved storage unit, like the above-described first reserved storage buffer and second reserved storage buffer, saves the order in which the ordinary reserved storage data is stored in an identifiable state, and changes according to the order. The general-purpose reserved storage data used for display is erased, and the data storage area is shifted one by one for the remaining general-purpose reserved storage data.

  In S <b> 502, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than the upper limit value, the CPU 756 extracts numerical data indicating random 4. Then, the extracted random 4 numerical data is set as general-purpose storage data in the first-order area of the data storage area that is not stored in the general-purpose storage section and is free. On the other hand, if the number of the general-purpose reserved memory reaches the upper limit value in the general-purpose reserved storage unit, the detection of the current game ball is invalidated, and the random number 4 is not newly extracted and stored.

  After the processing at the time of passing through the gate and after it is determined in S501 that the detection signal from the gate switch 732a is in the OFF state, the following S510 to S514 are performed according to the value of the normal symbol process flag. Execute each process.

  The normal symbol normal process of S510 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display by the normal symbol display unit 710 is started based on the presence / absence of the universal symbol storage data stored in the universal symbol storage unit. . At this time, for example, when there is the general-purpose hold storage data stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process of S511 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on whether or not the time reduction flag is set, it recognizes whether or not it is in the electric chew support control state, and the universal symbol hold memory stored in the head order of the universal symbol hold memory unit. Based on the data (numerical data indicating random 4 for determining the display result of the normal symbol), the normal symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. Or “departure” is determined.

  As described above, in the normal symbol display result determination table, when the electronic chew support control state corresponding to the short time state is set, the display result of the normal symbol is displayed more than in the normal gaming state which is the non-electric chew support control state. The decision value to be compared with the random number 4 is assigned so that the ratio of the decision of “winning” is increased. Thus, in the electric chew support control state, in the normal symbol determination process of S511, the display result of the normal symbol is more easily determined as “winning” compared to the normal game state, so that the variable winning ball device 715 is formed. The 2 start winning opening 714 is likely to be in an open state, and the game ball is likely to enter (start winning prize) into the second start winning opening 714.

  In the normal symbol determination process, the normal symbol variation time is also determined using the normal symbol display result determination table. As described above, in the normal symbol display result determination table, when the electric chew support control state corresponding to the short time state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is larger than that in the normal game state which is the non-electric chew support control state. It is set to be shorter. Thus, in the electric chew support control state, in the normal symbol determination process of S511, when the time reduction flag is set, the electric chew support control state is recognized, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is compared with the normal game state. The variation time is determined so as to be shorter. In the electric chew support control state, the interval at which the normal symbol variation display result is derived and displayed is shortened, and the interval at which the “win” variation display result is derived and displayed is also shortened, and the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is formed. The second start winning opening 714 is likely to be in an open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening 714 (start winning prize).

  Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 715 (second start winning port 714) are also determined using the normal symbol display result determination table. As described above, the normal symbol display result determination table recognizes that the electric chew support control state is in effect when the hourly flag is set, and if it is in the electric chew support control state, The opening time of the variable winning ball device 715 (second start winning port 714) is set longer and the number of times of opening is larger than in the case of a certain normal gaming state. Therefore, in the electric chew support control state, the open time of the variable winning ball device 715 (second start winning port 714) becomes longer than in the normal gaming state in the non-electric chew support control state, and Control is performed so that the number of times of opening is increased. As a result, in the electric chew support control state, the opening time becomes longer and the number of times of opening increases, so that the time and the number of times that the variable winning ball device 715 (second start winning port 714) is in the open state increase. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter (start winning prize) into the second starting winning opening 714.

  In the normal symbol determination process, after such various determinations are made, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “2”.

  The normal symbol variation process of S512 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the normal symbol variation display by the normal symbol display unit 710. The normal symbol that is variably displayed based on these settings is displayed with the normal symbol display result that is the normal symbol display result when the normal symbol stop process of S513 is executed and the variation display is stopped. In the normal symbol variation process, an elapsed time after the normal symbol starts to be varied is measured. At this time, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the variation time determined in the normal symbol determination process. When the determined fluctuation time is reached, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process of S513 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display unit 710 performs settings for stopping the normal symbol variation display and deriving and displaying the display result. The setting for deriving and displaying the display result of the normal symbol is set to “3” for the value of the normal symbol process flag when the measured elapsed time reaches the determined variation time in the normal symbol variation process of S512. It may be performed before the update. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the display result of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process is “winning”, the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is set with the opening time and the number of releases determined in the normal symbol determination process. After the operation pattern for driving the solenoid 716 to open and close is set, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the display result of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process is “out of”, the normal symbol process flag is cleared and the value is updated to “0”.

  The normal electric accessory actuating process of S514 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “4”. In this normal electric accessory actuating process, in response to the display result in the normal symbol variation display being “winning”, the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is operated to open the movable piece, thereby starting the second start. Control for changing the winning opening 714 from the closed state to the open state is performed. For example, in the normal electric accessory operation process, the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is generated by generating a drive control signal for driving the solenoid 716 according to the setting of the operation pattern set in the normal symbol stop process of S513. Then, control is performed to make the open state based on the release time and the number of releases determined in the normal symbol determination process. As a result, the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is opened and closed with an operation pattern corresponding to the gaming state and the display result as shown in FIG. When the driving of the solenoid 716 corresponding to the setting of the operation pattern is completed, the normal symbol process flag is cleared and the value is updated to “0”.

  Next, control executed by the effect control microcomputer 7100 will be described. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 7100.

  In FIG. 35, as an example, SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol, various effects SR2 for determination, SR4-1 for determining the pseudo-temporary first temporary stop symbol, SR4-2 for determining the pseudo-simultaneous second temporary stop symbol, SR4-3 for determining the pseudo-simultaneous third temporary stop symbol, SR4-4 for determining the fourth temporary stop symbol for pseudo continuous time and SR5 for selecting the button operation effect are shown.

  SR1-1, SR1-2, and SR1-3 are used for randomly determining the left, middle, and right stop symbols (final stop symbols excluding temporary stop symbols) of the effect symbols. SR2 is used for randomly determining various contents of effects such as the contents of effects by an image displayed on the effect display device 709. Each of the SR4-1 for determining the first temporary stop symbol for pseudo-continuous time and the SR4-4 for determining the fourth temporary stop symbol for pseudo-continuous time are the first times when the effect of the pseudo-continuous time as described above is performed. It is used to determine a temporary stop symbol at the time of temporary stop after re-variation to a temporary stop symbol at the time of temporary stop after the fourth re-variation.

  The random number SR5 is a random counter for selecting a button operation effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of button operation effects.

  Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR5 is generated by counting of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and is cyclically updated within the range associated in FIG. By being extracted at a given timing, it is used as a random number.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) in the effect display device 709.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal big hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 7101 stops the design. As a result, a combination of performance symbols (ordinary jackpot symbol combination) in which the left, middle, and right three symbols are even-numbered symbols is determined.

  When the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 7101 displays the left, middle, and right as stop symbols. A combination of effect symbols (probability variation winning symbol combinations) in which the three symbols are odd-numbered is determined. In the case of deviation (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than those described above (a combination of deviation symbols such as left / right inconsistency, right / left inconsistency, etc.) is determined. However, when the reach effect is accompanied, the combination of the effect symbols in which the left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

  The effect control CPU 7101 shows that the received display result designation command indicates a sudden big hit or a small hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command). , A combination of predetermined production symbols such as “1, 2, 3”, “4, 5, 6”, or “7, 8, 9” as stop symbols (recalling a state in which the probable big hit is latent) Specific combination of special symbols (chance pattern).

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 7100 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 7100 (specifically, effect control CPU 7101) mounted on the effect control board 780.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 7101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 7101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 7101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 7101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 7101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command is to indicate. Processing is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 7101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as a change display of effect symbols on the effect display device 709 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes according to the control state is performed. A process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and the effect control is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers including SR1-1, SR1-2, SR1-3 and SR2-SR5 as shown in FIG. 11 is executed (S706). . Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display states of the first hold storage display unit 718c and the second hold storage display unit 718d is executed (S707). Specifically, control is performed to display the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 718c corresponding to the data of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area. Further, control is performed to display the second reserved memory number on the second reserved memory display unit 718d corresponding to the data of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702.

  By executing such an effect control main process, the effect control microcomputer 7100 transmits an effect display device 709, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 7560 and received. By controlling the production device such as the speaker 727, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 7101 performs one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 709 is controlled to realize the effect symbol change display. However, the control related to the effect symbol change display synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 7560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is started. Further, the stop symbol (display result) of the effect symbol is determined based on SR1-1 to SR1-3 and the like. At the start of the variation display, the timing of the variation display time timer that measures the variation time of the variation display executed in response to the received variation pattern command is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors whether or not the variation time counted by the variation display time timer has ended. Then, based on the fact that the fluctuation time has ended or that an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop is received, the value of the effect control process flag is effected to end the variable display. It is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Control is performed to stop the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and derive and display the display result (stop symbol) of the variation display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display processing (S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 709 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S807).

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 709, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  The effect control CPU 7101 determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol as follows, for example. For example, in the effect symbol variation start process, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the stop symbol of the effect symbol are extracted, and a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating the effect symbol is associated with a numerical value. Are used to determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number. Then, the effect control CPU 7101 stops the effect symbol at the stop symbol determined in this way when stopping the variation display of the effect symbol. With regard to the production symbol, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit is called a big hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Specifically, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined as follows, for example. When determining a combination of non-reach off symbols, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing and stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 7100. Using the symbol determination data table, the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in a variation display result of the left, middle, and right effect symbols. Thus, when determining a combination of non-reach off symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with a combination of a big hit symbol or a combination of special symbols (chance eyes), Each stop symbol is determined by correcting it to be a combination (for example, correcting the right symbol by one symbol). Further, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number becomes a reach symbol by chance, each stop symbol is corrected by making a combination of non-reach off symbols (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol). Is determined.

  Further, when determining a combination of symbols that are out of reach, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and SR1-1 is used using a data table for determining outliers. The symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from is determined as the stop symbol of each effect symbol forming the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1-2 is the stop symbol of the final stop symbol As determined.

  In determining the jackpot symbol combination, the jackpot symbol combination is determined according to the jackpot type.

  When it is decided to make a promiscuous big hit, an odd big hit symbol determination table is used to select and determine any odd symbol combination such as “7, 7, 7” for left, middle and right, for example. To do. In the odd-hit symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of predetermined odd-number symbols. When determining the jackpot symbol combination of the odd symbol, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is extracted from the odd jackpot symbol determination table. It is determined as a combination of the stop symbols of the left, middle, and right effect symbols constituting the jackpot symbol combination. The symbol determined in this way is used as a final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, when it is decided to make a big jackpot, a combination of even symbols such as “2, 2, 2” for the left, middle and right is used, for example, by using the even big jackpot design table. Select and decide. In the even jackpot symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of predetermined even number symbols. When determining the combination of even big hit symbols, the numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbols corresponding to the extracted random numbers are combined using the even big hit symbol design table. Is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the left, middle and right effect symbols.

  Further, when it is determined to make a probable big hit or small hit, using the special symbol determination table, for example, “1,2,3”, “4,5,6” Alternatively, it is selected and determined as a combination of effect symbols of “7, 8, 9”.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 7101 executes control of the effect device is set. In other words, the effect control CPU 7101 has a process table during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. In accordance with the process data set in the above, effect devices (effect parts) such as the effect display device 709 are controlled.

  The process table includes process timer set values and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 709 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 7101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 39 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 780. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  The effect control CPU 7101 displays the contents of the process data 1 selected according to the change pattern in S801 to S803 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) when performing the change display of the effect symbols. ), The control of the effect device (the effect display device 709 as the effect part, the various lamps as the effect part, and the speakers 727R and 727L as the effect parts) is executed. For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 709, a command is output to the VDP 7109. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 735 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 770 in order to output audio from the speakers 727R and 727L.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 7101 controls the effect pattern CPU 7101 to display the effect symbol in a change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 7101 confirms whether or not the variation display result is determined to be off (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of order is determined by, for example, storing data indicating that the display result 1 designation command has been received for the variation display by command analysis processing in a variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM. It is determined by whether or not it exists. Note that whether or not it is determined to be off may be confirmed based on the type of variation pattern command that can specify whether or not to make a hit (big hit, small hit). If it is decided to be out of sync, a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern that does not become reach (a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation) (a fluctuation pattern command that indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation) is received as a fluctuation pattern command. It is confirmed whether it has been done (S602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 7101 determines a stop symbol that does not become the reach of the effect symbol using the predetermined error symbol determination data table ( The process proceeds to S604) and S606. In the loss symbol determination data table, the numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols. In the process of S604, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and extracted using a loss symbol determination data table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 7100. The symbol corresponding to the random number is determined as a combination of stop symbols resulting in a variation display result of the left, middle and right effect symbols. In this way, when determining a combination of non-reachable symbols, the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is accidentally a jackpot symbol combination (probability big hit symbol combination, normal jackpot symbol combination, random jackpot symbol combination) (In this embodiment, it is the same as the combination of the small hit symbols)), or if it matches the combination of the small hit symbols, correct so that it becomes the combination of the off symbol (for example, correction to shift the right symbol by one symbol) Each stop symbol is determined. In addition, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is accidentally a reach symbol, the stop symbol is corrected so as to be a combination of non-reach symbols (for example, correction for shifting the right symbol by one symbol) and stopping each symbol. The design is determined.

  When it is determined in step S602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the pattern is a reach variation pattern), the effect control CPU 7101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (S605). , The process proceeds to S606. In the process of S605, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is extracted using the loss symbol determination data table. A symbol corresponding to a random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1-2 is determined as a stop symbol of the middle symbol, which is determined as a stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state. Also in this case, if it happens to be a combination of a big hit symbol, a combination of a big hit symbol (the same applies to a combination of a small hit symbol), or a combination of a small hit symbol, Each stop symbol is determined by performing correction (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  If it is not determined to be off (S601), the effect control CPU 7101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the winning symbol combination according to the hit type including the big hit and the small hit. (S603), the process proceeds to S606.

  In S603, the winning symbol combination is determined according to the winning type as follows. The effect control CPU 7101 determines the type of jackpot based on which display result designation command of the display result 2 designation command to display result 5 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area, Judge that it is a hit.

  When it is determined that the probability variation big hit is decided, the probability variation big hit symbol determination table is used, and the combination of the probability variation big hit symbol (for example, “7, 7, 7” for the left, middle and right are either The combination of odd symbols is selected and determined. In the probability variation big hit symbol determination table, each of the numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of predetermined probability variation big hit symbols. When determining the combination of probability variation jackpot symbols, the numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is combined with the probability variation jackpot symbol combination using the probability variation jackpot design table. Is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the left, middle and right effect symbols. The symbol determined in this way is used as a final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Also, when the effect control CPU 7101 determines that it is normally decided to make a big hit, the normal big hit symbol determination table is used to set the normal big hit symbol combination (for example, “2, left, middle, right” are “2,” 2) ”is selected and determined. In the normal jackpot symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of predetermined types of normal jackpot symbols. When determining the combination of the normal jackpot symbol, the numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is extracted from the normal jackpot symbol determination table. Is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the left, middle and right effect symbols.

  Also, when the effect control CPU 7101 determines that it is determined to make a surprise big hit, the combination of the sudden big hit symbols (for example, “1, 2, , 3 "," 4, 5, 6 ", or" 7, 8, 9 "chance combination). In the accuracy symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of combinations of a plurality of types of accuracy accuracy hit symbols. When determining the combination of the winning big hit symbol, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is configured using the winning symbol determination table. The combination of the stop symbol of the left, middle and right effect symbols is determined.

  When the effect control CPU 7101 determines that it is decided to make a small hit, the combination of the small hit big hit symbols (for example, “1” is set for the left, middle and right) using the small hit symbol determination table. , 2, 3 ”,“ 4, 5, 6 ”or“ 7, 8, 9 ”or the like). In the small hit symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of types of small hit symbol combinations. When determining the small hit symbol combination, the numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is extracted using the small hit symbol determination table. Is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the left, middle and right effect symbols. Note that the multiple types of chance items in the small symbol design determination table may all be the same as the chance items in the accuracy symbol determination table, and some of them are the same as the chance events in the accuracy symbol determination table. May be. Further, the plurality of types of chance items in the small hit symbol determination table may be different from the chance items in the accuracy symbol determination table, but similar and difficult to distinguish.

  Next, the effect control CPU 7101 determines whether or not a temporary stop effect as an effect that needs to determine a temporary stop symbol such as “pseudo-continuous” is performed (S606). Whether or not a temporary stop effect is to be performed is determined according to whether or not “pseudo-continuous” is indicated by the variation pattern command. When the temporary stop effect is not performed, the effect setting process is terminated, and when the temporary stop effect is performed, the temporary stop symbol is determined as follows.

  When a temporary stop effect such as “pseudo-continuous” is performed, the effect control CPU 7101 uses a pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 7100 to use a plurality of types of temporary stop effects. A combination of temporary stop symbols to be used is determined from the combinations of stop symbols (S607), and the process proceeds to S620. In the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR4-1 to SR4-4 is associated with each combination of temporary stop symbols including a plurality of types of pseudo-continuous chances. Yes. The temporary stop symbol determined based on the numerical data extracted from SR4-1 is determined as the pseudo continuous first temporary stop symbol. The temporary stop symbol determined based on the numerical data extracted from SR4-2 is determined as the pseudo continuous second temporary stop symbol. The temporary stop symbol determined based on the numerical data extracted from SR4-3 is determined as the pseudo continuous third temporary stop symbol. The temporary stop symbol determined based on the numerical data extracted from SR4-4 is determined as the pseudo continuous fourth temporary stop symbol.

  Specifically, in the case of the production of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous first temporary stop symbol determining random number SR4-1 to the pseudo-continuous The 3 temporary stop symbol determining random number SR4-3 is selected, and each random number is extracted to determine each of the temporary stop symbol at the first temporary stop to the temporary stop symbol at the third temporary stop.

  On the other hand, when the temporary stop effect such as “pseudo train” is not performed, the combination of the temporary stop symbols is not determined and the process proceeds to S620.

  In S620, the effect control CPU 7101 determines the effect control pattern as one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns (S620). In S620, the effect control CPU 7101 performs a plurality of types of symbol variations stored in the symbol variation control pattern table in accordance with the various effect control (effect operations) patterns designated by the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Of the control patterns, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as an effect control pattern to be used as the effect of the variable display. In selecting the effect control pattern in S620 as described above, if it is specified that a temporary stop effect such as a pseudo-continuation is to be executed by the change pattern designation command, the temporary stop symbol determined in the process of S607 is temporarily stopped. To be done.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 7100, for example, the production display device in the period from the start of the production design change until the production design to be the final stop design is stopped and displayed. Data indicating the control content of various effect operations such as the effect display variation display operation in the display area 709, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation in the pseudo-rendition effect, and the effect display operation in the notice effect Multiple types of variation control patterns are stored.

  In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, an effect symbol variation display such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling the various types of performance operations is included, and the contents of the various types of performance control, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like are set in time series.

  Next, the effect control CPU 7101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S620 (S621). Then, a process timer (production setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S622).

  Then, the production control CPU 7101 performs the production device (the production display device 709 as the production component and the production component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 727 as a production component is started (S624). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 7109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 709. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 735 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 770 in order to output audio from the speaker 727. In addition, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 is output in accordance with the movable member control data.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation display time timer (S625). The variation display time timer is a timer for measuring the variation time from the start of variation of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (S626), and the process ends.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation process (S802) in the effect control process.

  In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 7101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation display time timer (S842). Then, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (S843).

  Until the process timer times out (until N is determined in S843), the process proceeds to S846. When it is determined in S843 that the process timer has timed out (when it is determined Y in S843), the process data is switched (S844). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer (S844). In addition, the next process data such as changing the control state for the rendering device (production component) based on process data such as display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next. The rendering device is controlled according to the contents of (S845).

  In this way, by performing time management using the process timer and sequentially switching the process data, for example, various effect controls including variable display control as shown in FIGS. 11 to 15 are performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 7101 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out based on the value of the variable display time timer (S847). If the variation display time timer has timed out (if determined as Y in S847), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) (S849). On the other hand, when the variable display time timer has not timed out (when it is determined N in S847), it is confirmed whether or not a confirmation command reception flag indicating that a symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set ( S848). When the confirmation command reception flag is not set (when it is determined as N in S848), the effect symbol changing process is ended. On the other hand, when the confirmation command reception flag is set (when it is determined Y in S848), the process proceeds to S849. Even if the fluctuation display time timer has not timed out (even if it is not determined to be Y in S847), the control shifts to the control to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation designation command is received. Even when a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time is received due to this, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  In addition, the part which performs the process of S841-S845 based on the fluctuation pattern containing the effect of a "pseudo ream" is equivalent to the re-change effect control process which performs a re-change effect.

  For example, in the effect control microcomputer 7100, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped. The fluctuation display is controlled so as to be executed at a fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern command.

  In the effect control microcomputer 7100, the state of the game state is determined based on the normal state designation command, the short time state designation command, the probability variation end designation command, etc. transmitted from the game control microcomputer 7560. The data specifying whether or not the game is present is stored, and the gaming state is always recognized based on the stored data. Then, based on the gaming state recognized in this way and the variation pattern command transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 7560, the rendering control microcomputer 7100 has a rendering mode according to the current gaming state. The variation display of the effect design is executed.

[Configuration and Function of Portable Terminal 100]
FIG. 42 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of the mobile terminal 100 in the present embodiment. 42, mobile terminal 100 includes data processing unit 110, storage unit 120, data input unit 130, display unit 140, voice input / output unit 150, wireless communication unit 160, antenna 161, and the like. The infrared communication unit 180 and the camera unit 190 are included.

  The storage unit 120 includes a semiconductor memory such as a nonvolatile memory such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) or a flash memory, or a volatile memory such as a RAM (Random Access Memory). The storage unit 120 stores programs and data such as application programs for causing the data processing unit 110 to execute various functions of the mobile terminal 100.

  The data input unit 130 includes dial keys, cross operation keys, and other function keys for inputting numbers such as telephone numbers and various data, alphabets, and other characters. The data input unit 130 receives data input from the user and transfers the input data to the data processing unit 110.

  The display unit 140 includes a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as “LCD”). The display unit 140 may be configured by other display devices such as an EL (Electro Luminescence) display. Display unit 140 displays character data and image data received from data processing unit 110.

  The voice input / output unit 150 includes a microphone and a speaker. The voice input / output unit 150 converts the voice input from the outside into the microphone into an electric signal, passes it to the data processing unit 110, converts the electric signal from the data processing unit 110 into voice, and outputs it to the outside through a speaker. .

  The wireless communication unit 160 delivers a signal received from another mobile terminal or server via the antenna 161 to the data processing unit 110 and causes the antenna 161 to output a signal to be transmitted from the data processing unit 110 to the other mobile terminal or server.

  The infrared communication unit 180 delivers a signal received by infrared from another device to the data processing unit 110, receives a signal to be transmitted to another device from the data processing unit 110, and transmits the signal by infrared.

  The camera unit 190 captures an imaging target, converts the captured image into image data, and outputs the converted image data to the data processing unit 110.

  The data processing unit 110 is configured by a microprocessor (Micro Processing Unit, hereinafter referred to as “MPU”). The data processing unit 110 includes a storage unit 120, a data input unit 130, a voice input / output unit 150, a wireless communication unit 160, an infrared communication unit 180, or a camera unit 190 according to a program such as an application program stored in the storage unit 120. Is input to the storage unit 120, the display unit 140, the voice input / output unit 150, the wireless communication unit 160, or the infrared communication unit 180.

  In the present embodiment, portable terminal 100 may or may not include voice input / output unit 150.

[Configuration and Function of Information Providing Server 200]
FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the information providing server 200 in the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 43, information providing server 200 includes a data processing unit 210, a storage unit 220, a data input unit 230, a display unit 240, and a communication unit 260.

  The storage unit 220 includes a nonvolatile memory such as a ROM and a flash memory, a semiconductor memory such as a volatile memory such as a RAM, and an external storage device such as a hard disk. The storage unit 220 stores programs and data for causing the data processing unit 210 to execute various functions of the information providing server 200.

  The data input unit 230 includes input devices such as a keyboard and a mouse. The data input unit 230 receives data input from a user such as an administrator of the information providing server 200 and transfers the input data to the data processing unit 210.

  The display unit 240 is configured with an LCD. The display unit 240 may be configured by other display devices such as a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display and an EL (Electro Luminescence) display. Display unit 240 displays character data and image data received from data processing unit 210.

  The communication unit 260 transfers data received from the mobile terminal 100 or another server via the communication network 900 to the data processing unit 210, and the data processing unit 210 transmits the data to the mobile terminal 100 or other server via the communication network 900. Output the data to be sent.

  The data processing unit 210 is configured with an MPU. The data processing unit 210 processes the data input from the storage unit 220, the data input unit 230, or the communication unit 260 according to the program stored in the storage unit 220, and the storage unit 220, the display unit 240, or The data is output to the communication unit 260.

[Process to provide specific information]
When a game application program (hereinafter referred to as “game app”) is activated on the mobile terminal 100, a function selection menu is displayed. When a specific information acquisition function is selected in the function selection menu, the image of FIG. Acquisition display processing is executed.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of processing for acquiring specific information executed by the mobile terminal 100 and the information providing server 200 in the first embodiment. Referring to FIG. 44, in step S101, the data processing unit 110 puts the shooting marks 701A and 701B of the shooting target area of the game board 706 of the pachinko gaming machine 700 into a predetermined range on the screen (or matches a predetermined mark). ) Control the display unit 140 to display the message. In addition to the display, it may be notified by voice instead of the display.

  Referring to FIG. 3 again, in the present embodiment, the shooting target area is an area surrounded by thick broken lines on the left side and the right side of effect display device 709. In the shooting target area on the left side of the effect display device 709, there is a bowl-shaped shooting mark 701A at the upper left of the area. When shooting the shooting target area on the left side of the effect display device 709, a saddle type for aligning the shooting mark 701A on the upper left of the screen is superimposed on the image shot by the camera unit 190 and displayed on the display unit 140. Is displayed on the display unit 140.

  In addition, the shooting target area on the right side of the effect display device 709 has a star-shaped shooting mark 701B near the center of the area. When shooting the shooting target region on the right side of the effect display device 709, there is a range for aligning the shooting mark 701B at the center of the screen so as to overlap the image shot by the camera unit 190 and displayed on the display unit 140. It is displayed on the display unit 140.

  Returning to FIG. 44, in step S102, the data processing unit 110 displays the image captured and input by the camera unit 190 and the range or mark for matching the shooting mark so as to continuously display. To control.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an aspect when the player photographs the area to be photographed of the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to the first embodiment. Referring to FIG. 45, the player holds the portable terminal 100 at a position where the shooting target area can be shot from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 700, and the range or mark for matching the shooting marks 701A and 701B. The holding position is finely adjusted so that the photographing marks 701A and 701B are aligned.

  Returning to FIG. 44, in step S103, the data processing unit 110 determines whether or not the positions of the photographing marks 701A and 701B are within the range for aligning the photographing marks 701A and 701B or the range for the mark. Determine whether. When it is determined that it is not within the prescribed range (when NO is determined in step S103), the data processing unit 110 returns the process to be executed to the process of step S102.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the prescribed range (when YES is determined in step S103), in step S104, the data processing unit 110 flows down the game area 707 and enters the shooting target area. Then, the camera unit 190 is controlled so that the locus is taken as a moving image and stored in the storage unit 120. Next, in step S <b> 107, the wireless communication unit 160 is controlled to transmit the shooting data stored in the storage unit 120 to the information providing server 200.

  46 to 49 are first to fourth diagrams illustrating examples of images displayed on the mobile terminal 100 in the first embodiment. Referring to FIGS. 46 to 49, image data as shown on the left screen of each figure is transmitted to information providing server 200.

  Returning to FIG. 44, in the information providing server 200, the corresponding image transmission processing is repeatedly executed as a subroutine. In the corresponding image transmission process, first, in step S <b> 201, the data processing unit 210 determines whether or not shooting data is received from the mobile terminal 100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S201), the data processing unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of the corresponding image transmission process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shooting data has been received (YES in step S201), the data processing unit 210 stores the received shooting data in the storage unit 220 in step S202.

  Next, in step S203, the data processing unit 210 analyzes the trajectory features of the pachinko balls from the stored shooting data. For example, in the case of the imaging target region on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, it is analyzed whether or not the locus is such that the pachinko ball is directed in the direction of the first start winning opening 713 or the second starting winning opening 714. Further, in the case of the shooting target region on the right side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, it is analyzed whether or not the trajectory is such that a pachinko ball enters the hole in front of the winning prize distribution unit 746.

  In step S204, the data processing unit 210 selects an image, which is specific information corresponding to the analysis result, from the provided information table.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of the provision information table according to the first embodiment. Referring to FIG. 50, when the analysis result is good, the image data with the file name “IM01.jpg” is selected as the image data which is the provided information. If the analysis result is bad, the image data with the file name “IM02.jpg” is selected.

  For example, when the analysis result is good, in the case of the imaging target region on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the path is such that the pachinko ball is directed in the direction of the first start winning port 713 or the second starting winning port 714. In the case of the shooting target region on the right side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the locus is such that a pachinko ball enters the hole in front of the winning prize distribution unit 746.

  On the other hand, when the analysis result is bad, in the case of the imaging target region on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the trajectory that the pachinko ball does not face in the direction of the first start winning port 713 or the second starting winning port 714. In the case of the shooting target area on the right side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the locus is such that the pachinko ball does not enter the hole in front of the winning prize distribution unit 746.

  Referring back to FIG. 44, in step S205, the data processing unit 210 causes the communication unit 260 to transmit the image data selected in step S204 corresponding to the shooting data to the mobile terminal 100 that has transmitted the shooting data. Control.

  In the portable terminal 100, it is determined in step S111 whether image data of a corresponding image has been received from the information providing server 200. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S111), data processing unit 110 repeats the process in step S111.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been received (if YES is determined in step S111), in step S112, the data processing unit 110 displays the corresponding image indicated by the received image data in the shooting target area of the gaming area 707 being displayed. The display unit 140 is controlled so as to be superimposed on the image.

  Referring to FIG. 46 again, in the case of the shooting target area on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the trajectory is such that the pachinko ball is directed in the direction of the first start winning opening 713 or the second starting winning opening 714. An image indicating that the analysis result is good and the analysis result is good (in this case, an image in which the character says “That is good!”) Is displayed superimposed on the image of the shooting target area.

  Referring again to FIG. 47, in the case of the shooting target region on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the trajectory is such that the pachinko ball does not face in the direction of the first start winning opening 713 or the second starting winning opening 714. Therefore, it is determined that the analysis result is bad, and an image indicating that the analysis result is bad (in this case, an image in which the character says “Do your best!”) Is displayed superimposed on the image of the imaging target area.

  Referring again to FIG. 48, in the case of the shooting target region on the right side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the locus is such that a pachinko ball enters the hole in front of the big prize distribution unit 746. An image indicating that the analysis result is good and the analysis result is good (in this case, an image in which the character is saying “Good!”) Is superimposed on the image of the shooting target area. Displayed.

  Referring to FIG. 49 again, in the case of the shooting target region on the right side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the trajectory is such that the pachinko ball does not enter the hole in front of the winning prize distribution unit 746. Since the analysis result is judged to be bad because the chance of hitting is high, an image indicating that the analysis result is bad (in this case, an image in which the character says “Do your best!”) Is superimposed on the image of the shooting target area. Is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 44, next, in step S113, the data processing unit 110 determines whether or not photographing is continued. For example, the same determination as in step S103 is performed, and if the position of the shooting mark is within the specified range, it is determined that the shooting is continued, and if it is outside the specified range, it is determined that the shooting is not continued. To do.

  If it is determined that shooting is continued (YES in step S113), the data processing unit 110 returns the process to be executed to the process in step S102. On the other hand, if it is determined that shooting is not continued (NO in step S113), the process to be executed is returned to the caller process of this image acquisition / display process.

  In information providing server 200, after step S205, it is determined in step S211 whether or not the next shooting data has been received from the same portable terminal 100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S211), the data processing unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of the corresponding image transmission process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the next shooting data has been received (YES in step S211), the data processing unit 210 stores the received shooting data in the storage unit 220 in step S212.

  Next, in step S213, the data processing unit 210 analyzes the feature of the pachinko ball trajectory from the history of the captured image data. For example, in the case of the shooting target region on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, a trajectory in which the pachinko ball is in the direction of the first start winning port 713 or the second starting winning port 714 is not directed. It is analyzed whether there are more than those. In addition, in the case of the shooting target region on the right side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the locus that is a locus where a pachinko ball enters the hole in front of the winning prize distribution unit 746 is a locus that does not enter. Analyzes whether there are too many.

  In step S214, the data processing unit 210 selects an image, which is specific information corresponding to the analysis result, from the provided information table similar to that described with reference to FIG.

  For example, when the analysis result is good, in the case of the imaging target region on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, the path is such that the pachinko ball is directed in the direction of the first start winning port 713 or the second starting winning port 714. This is a case in which there is more than a certain locus that does not go, and in the case of the shooting target area on the right side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, a pachinko ball enters the hole in front of the winning prize distribution unit 746. This is the case where the number of such trajectories is greater than the number of trajectories that do not need to be entered.

  On the other hand, the case where the analysis result is bad is a trajectory in which the pachinko ball is directed in the direction of the first start winning port 713 or the second starting winning port 714 in the case of the imaging target region on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. In the case of the shooting target area on the right side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 3, there is a pachinko ball in the hole in front of the winning prize distribution unit 746. This is the case where the number of trajectories that enter is less than the number of trajectories that do not enter.

  Referring back to FIG. 44, in step S215, the data processing unit 210 causes the communication unit 260 to transmit the image data selected in step S214 corresponding to the shooting data to the mobile terminal 100 that has transmitted the shooting data. Control.

  In the portable terminal 100, the processing described in steps S111 to S113 is executed again. Thereby, the player can be informed of the tendency of the pachinko ball trajectory.

[Modification of First Embodiment]
Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.

  (1) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 780, the audio output board 770, and the lamp driver board 735 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 709 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 727R, 727L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 7560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 7100. However, the game control microcomputer 7560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. (Sound / lamp board having a function by a circuit mounted on the sound output board 770 and a function by a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 735). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 7100 on the effect control board 780 via another board. In this case, the command may simply be passed through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the sound output board 770, the lamp driver board 735, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 709 and control the effect display microcomputer 7100. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 7100 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 7560 in the above embodiment, and the sound output board 770, the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 735 or the sound / lamp board. In the case of such a configuration, various determinations performed by the effect control microcomputer 7100 in the above-described embodiment may be similarly performed by the effect control microcomputer 7100, or the sound output may be performed. Control means such as a microcomputer mounted on the board 770, the lamp driver board 735, or the sound / lamp board may be used.

  (3) The embodiment described above is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing a gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  (4) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 700. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment can be executed not only by executing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (5) As a control for realizing the short-time state, when the time-short state is controlled, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time compared to the non-time-short state is increased. The time may be shortened. In addition, as a control for realizing the short-time state, a plurality of types of variation patterns dedicated to the non-short-time state and a plurality of types of variation patterns dedicated to the short-time state whose average variation time is shorter than the variation pattern are provided, In the non-short-time state, select a variation pattern from multiple types of variation patterns dedicated to the non-time-short state, and in the short-time state, select a variation pattern from multiple types of variation patterns dedicated to the short-time state. It may be.

  (6) In the above-mentioned embodiment, the example which provided the big hit of 15 rounds and the big hit of 2 rounds as a big hit type was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a big hit type of three or more rounds may be provided, such as a big hit of 15 rounds, a big hit of 10 rounds, a big hit of 5 rounds, and a big hit of 2 rounds. Good. In that case, for example, the big hit type is classified into a big hit type group (for example, a big hit of 15 rounds, a big hit of 10 rounds) and a big hit type group (for example, 5 rounds) where it is difficult to obtain a winning ball. And the 2nd special symbol is set so that the ratio of the big hit type of the big hit type group where the prize ball is easily obtained is higher than the 1st special symbol. May be. At that time, the control related to the short-time state as shown in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot type of the jackpot type group in which a winning ball is easily obtained, the same control as the big hit of 15 rounds in the above-described embodiment, For the big hit type of the big hit type group where it is difficult to obtain a winning ball, the same control as the two round big hit in the above-described embodiment is performed, so that the control of the variation time as described above is performed on a group basis. May be.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the control for changing the selection ratio of the variation pattern according to the number of reserved storage is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control for varying the selection ratio of the variation pattern according to the number of reserved memories may not be performed.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol are made to correspond one-to-one and selected simultaneously using the same random value (random 1) is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for each jackpot type, each of a plurality of jackpot symbols is associated with a jackpot symbol determining random number value provided separately from the random number value for determining the jackpot type, and the jackpot type is determined. Thereafter, a process for selecting and determining one jackpot symbol from a plurality of jackpot symbols included in the determined jackpot type may be performed using a random number value for determining the jackpot symbol.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 720 in the big hit gaming state for the big hit where the winning ball is easy to obtain (15 round big hit) and the big hit where the winning ball is difficult to get (surprise big hit). Or the example which divides the type of jackpot by the frequency | count of opening of the 2nd special variable winning ball apparatus 745 was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of opening is the same for big hits where prize balls are easily obtained and big hits where prize balls are difficult to obtain. For a big hit where it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, an extremely short opening time may be used in which a prize ball is difficult to obtain. In such a case, even when the small hit as described above is provided, the number of times and the opening time are the same as those for the big hit where it is difficult to obtain a winning ball. In this way, there is no need to provide a display lamp (round lamp) for distinguishing the number of times of opening at the time of a big hit, so that it is impossible to determine at all from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 700 whether or not it is in a probable variation state. be able to.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 7560 determines the type of reach effect including super reach, the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, and the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream, and the effect control microcomputer 7100. Shows an example of determining the type of super-reach development and the temporary stop pattern before development. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the game control microcomputer 7560, the type of reach production including super reach, the presence / absence of a pseudo run, the number of re-variations of the pseudo run, the type of super reach development production, and pre-development temporary stop The symbols may be determined, and the determination results may be instructed to the effect control microcomputer 7100 by an effect control command.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the development effect that develops from the normal reach to the super reach is executed after the fluctuation display is performed by the normal reach. And, when the number of re-variations of the pseudo-run performed before reaching the reach state is a predetermined number or more, for example, 4 times, by selecting only the development effect that does not re-variate in the development effect, It was shown that excessive re-variation was performed to prevent the production from becoming too redundant. Not limited to this, when the number of times of re-variation of the pseudo-series performed before reaching the reach state is a predetermined number or more, for example, 4 times, the super-reach is not performed without executing the fluctuation display in the normal reach. By performing the control to shift to, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming too redundant.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, for example, in the variation pattern in which the re-variation of the pseudo-series is performed as in Super Reach B, even if the number of re-variations of the pseudo-series is small even in the same super reach, An example is shown in which the control is performed so that it is likely to be a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the super reach D is provided and the quasi-continuous re-variation is performed in the super reach D, if the number of re-variations of the quasi-continuous is small even in the same super reach, the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit A configuration may be added so that control that tends to occur is performed. In this way, even when the number of re-variations of the pseudo-series is the same, when the re-variation of the pseudo-series is performed in the super reach B, it is likely to be a sudden big hit, and the re-variation of the pseudo-series is performed in the super reach D. It is possible to make it easy to make a promising big hit or a normal big hit. In this way, the type of jackpot that is likely to occur is different based on the relationship between the number of re-variations of the quasi-ream and the reach production, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, when the development effect for super reach is started, the effect for development to super reach is shown. However, in addition to such an effect, an effect that does not develop into a super reach even when the development effect is started may be selected to be executable at a predetermined rate.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which separate effects are performed for super reach A to super reach C has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and some of the superreach A to C may be performed as follows. For example, for Super Reach C, the first character CH1 appears and executes the first development effect that performs the first action, and then the second character CH2 appears and performs the second action. Next, a three-stage development effect is performed in which a third development effect is performed in which the first character CH1 and the second character CH2 appear and perform a third action. Further, for the super reach B, a two-stage development effect for executing the first development effect and the second development effect is performed. For Super Reach A, a one-stage development effect is performed in which only the first development effect described above is executed. If the development development that develops in the order of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C in such a plurality of stages is performed, the expectation that becomes the big hit from the Super Reach A that has the lowest expected degree of big win is the highest. As you move toward higher Super Reach C, you can produce a stage where the reach stage develops in multiple stages. Thus, by giving each of the super reach A to C interrelationships, it is possible to improve the fun of the development effect and to improve the interest of the game.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, a specific effect display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times after the display of the effect symbol is displayed until the display result of the effect symbol is derived and displayed repeatedly. As a variation pattern, a variation pattern in which re-variation is repeatedly executed is shown as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as such a repetitive fluctuation pattern, various fluctuation patterns may be used in addition to the fluctuation patterns shown below. It is also possible to perform an effect such that a reach effect is executed after repeatedly performing an effect display that is updated in such a manner that a part of the symbols are slid after temporarily stopping all the symbols of the effect symbols. In addition, as such a repetitive variation pattern, after a temporary stop of all the symbols of the effect symbols, a part or all of the symbols are re-variable and an effect display for executing a predetermined notice is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times, and then a reach effect is performed. You may make it perform the effect which performs. In addition, as such a repetitive variation pattern, after the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped in sequence, the right effect symbol is re-varied and temporarily stopped before the middle effect symbol is stopped as a specific effect display. A variation pattern in which the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit increases as the number of repetitions increases may be executed. In addition, as such a repetitive variation pattern, before the first stop symbol such as the left effect symbol stops, or until the second stop symbol such as the right effect symbol stops, In the variable display, the effect executed so far (for example, the development effect when the development effect is performed) is repeatedly executed as a specific effect display from the beginning, and the greater the number of repetitions, the larger the bonus. It is also possible to execute a variation pattern that increases the degree of expectation.

  In these repetitive fluctuation patterns, an effect of increasing the operational feeling of the chance button 111 is executed from the middle of a plurality of operations in the pseudo-series as shown in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. You may do it.

  (16) In the embodiment described above, when the number of times of re-variation of the pseudo-series is small (for example, a variation pattern such as one pseudo-series), a predetermined variation display (for example, a variation pattern such as four pseudo-series) is performed. Control that makes it easier to hit a sudden hit than when it is executed (a control that has a higher rate of selecting a fluctuation pattern for one pseudo-ream when compared to a hit that is determined to be a promising big hit) An example to do is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following control may be performed when the number of re-variations of the pseudo-series is small. For example, when the number of re-fluctuations in the quasi-ream is small, control that makes it more likely to be a sudden big hit than when a predetermined big change or normal big hit is executed as a predetermined fluctuation display Compared to the case where the control pattern is determined in (1), control with a higher ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-continuous operation may be performed. Also, when the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream is small, control that makes the big hit more likely than when the small hit is executed as a predetermined fluctuation display (when the big hit is determined, In comparison, a control with a high ratio of selecting a fluctuation pattern for one pseudo-continuous operation may be performed. In addition, when the number of re-variations of the pseudo-series is small, the control is more likely to be a sudden big hit than when the fluctuation display that is out of place as the predetermined fluctuation display is executed. Compared to the time, control with a higher ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-ream may be performed. In addition, when there are multiple sudden hits with different opening counts, when the number of re-variations of the quasi-ream is small, the number of opening rounds is less when the number of releases is less than the case of the hit big hits with a large number of opening as a predetermined fluctuation display. Perform control that makes it easy to hit big hits (control with a higher rate of selecting a variation pattern for one pseudo-ream when compared to a big hit with a large number of releases when it is decided for a big hit with a small number of releases) You may do it. In addition, when there are multiple big hits with different number of times that the winning ball can be obtained and selected, when the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream is small, the number of times of opening is larger than when the number of times of opening is large as the predetermined fluctuation display. Control that makes it easy to become a big hit with a small number of times (a control with a higher rate of selecting a variation pattern of one pseudo-continuous when a big hit with a small number of releases is decided than when a big hit with a large number of releases is decided) You may do it. In addition, when there are multiple jackpots with different durations in the probability variation state, when the number of re-fluctuations in the quasi-ream is small, the probability variation is greater than when the jackpot has a long duration in the probability variation state as a predetermined variation display. Control that tends to be a big jackpot with a short duration of state (when the duration of the probabilistic state is determined to be a big jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-continuation is longer than when the duration of the probabilistic state is determined to be a big jackpot (The control with a high ratio of selecting) may be performed. In addition, when there are multiple probability variation big hits with different probabilities of being big hits after probability fluctuations, and when the number of re-variations of the quasi-ream is small, the probability of hitting as a predetermined fluctuation display is higher than the probability variation big hits. Control that tends to be a probable big hit with a low probability of winning (when a probable big hit with a low chance of winning is determined, a single pseudo-variation compared to when a probable big hit with a high probability of winning is determined. Control with a high ratio of selecting a pattern) may be performed. In addition, when there are multiple jackpots with different durations in the time-saving state and are selected, when the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream is small, it is shorter than when the jackpot has a long duration in the time-short state as a predetermined fluctuation display. Control that tends to be a big hit with a short duration of the state (when the duration of the short-time state is determined to be a short jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-continuous compared to when the duration of the short time state is determined to be a big jackpot (The control with a high ratio of selecting) may be performed. In addition, when there are multiple big hits with different speed reduction rates in the short-time state after the big hit, and selected, when the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream is small, a big hit with a large change time reduction rate in the short-time state as a predetermined fluctuation display Control that makes the fluctuation time reduction rate in the short-time state easier to be a big hit than in the case of (When the fluctuation time reduction rate in the short-time state is decided to be a big jackpot, the big fluctuation time reduction rate in the short-time state is decided to be a big hit Compared to when the control is performed, control with a higher ratio of selecting the variation pattern of one pseudo-continuous operation may be performed.

  (17) In the embodiment described above, the time distribution of each time of the pseudo-ream is not particularly limited. However, the time allocation of each time of the pseudo-continuous may be the same or different. If they are different, the player can be interested in the time distribution of each pseudo-ream.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, the trajectory of the pachinko ball is photographed as a moving image, and image data corresponding to the analysis result of the moving image is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific information (for example, image data) corresponding to the analysis result of the photographed image is determined by photographing the position of the game medium (for example, a pachinko ball) in the photographing target area of the game area 707. Anything can be used.

  For example, a continuous still image of a pachinko ball trajectory may be taken and image data corresponding to the analysis result of the continuous still image may be selected. In addition, a still image (for example, a still image when crossing a certain line in the shooting target area) when passing through a certain part of the locus of the pachinko ball is shot, and an image corresponding to the analysis result of the still image Data may be selected.

(19) In the above-described embodiment, the image data to be displayed overlaid on the image of the shooting target area is determined as the specific information corresponding to the analysis result of the shot image. Since the display of such image data is to display another image related to the image superimposed on the actual game board 706 image, augmented reality (AR) is played. It can be considered as a display given to the person.
However, the specific information is not limited to this, and the specific information may be a game such as an image, a wallpaper, a music and a ringtone for giving to the player, and a URL for accessing a homepage for the player to obtain a privilege. It may be information that is not related, or may be information related to a game, such as the type of the current gaming state that can be analyzed from the captured image (for example, the probability variation latency, the type of bonus).

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the information providing server 200 executes the process of analyzing the captured image and determining the specific information according to the analysis result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of analyzing the captured image and the process of determining the specific information according to the analysis result are executed by the mobile terminal 100, the information providing server 200, the card unit, and the pachinko gaming machine. Any device included in the gaming system 10 such as 700, the slot machine 800, and a game hall management computer may be used.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, in the analysis of the captured image, the movable state of the movable member such as the windmill 703 is not particularly analyzed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the captured image analysis, the captured image may be analyzed based on the movable state of the movable members such as the windmill 703 and the movable stage.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, the mobile terminal 100 transmits shooting data to the information providing server 200, and the information providing server 200 analyzes the shooting data and specifies specific information (for example, an image) corresponding to the analysis result. ) Is determined, and the determined specific information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 100, and the mobile terminal 100 outputs (for example, displays) the transmitted specific information. In this case, an application program for executing the image acquisition / display process shown in FIG. 44 described above is downloaded to the mobile terminal 100 in advance.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mobile terminal 100 analyzes the captured data, transmits the analysis result to the information providing server 200, and the information providing server 200 determines the specific information corresponding to the analysis result. The specific information may be transmitted to the mobile terminal 100, and the mobile terminal 100 may output (for example, display) the transmitted specific information. Further, the mobile terminal 100 may analyze the shooting data, determine specific information corresponding to the analysis result, and output the determined specific information.

  In these cases, an application program for executing these functions, data for analysis, and data for specific information are downloaded to the mobile terminal 100 in advance. In the latter case, all processes for outputting specific information can be performed only by the portable terminal 100 without accessing the information providing server 220.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, in addition to determining the specific information according to the passage mode of one game medium (for example, a pachinko ball), the specification according to the history of the passage mode of the game medium Information was decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific information may not be determined according to the history of the passing mode of the game medium, but may be determined according to the passing mode of one game medium. Further, the specific information may not be determined according to the passage mode of one game medium, but may be determined according to the history of the game mode.

  (24) The delimiter for storing and transmitting the shooting data in step S104 and step S107 in FIG. 44 of the above-described embodiment may be, for example, every fixed time or a fixed number of game media (pachinko balls). ) May be taken every time.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 700 does not perform a suggestion effect that suggests shooting of the passage mode of the game medium in the specific area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and such a suggestion effect may be executed by the effect display device 709, for example.

  For example, the player can prepare for shooting by performing a suggestion effect before opening the second special prize-ball device 745 when a big hit or a small hit is made for two rounds. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific information from being seen without being able to photograph the pachinko ball won in the second special winning ball apparatus 745.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, image data corresponding to the position (for example, trajectory) of a game medium (for example, a pachinko ball) in the shooting target area of the game area 707 is selected. In the second embodiment, an image corresponding to an arrangement state of a trajectory changing member (for example, a nail, a windmill, a stage, and a warp) for changing the trajectory of a game medium (for example, a pachinko ball) in the game area 707. Make sure the data is selected.

[Process to provide specific information]
FIG. 51 is a front view of a game board 706A of a pachinko gaming machine 700A according to the second embodiment. Referring to FIG. 51, a difference from the game board 706 of FIG. 3 described in the first embodiment is a shooting target area and a shooting mark.

  In the second embodiment, the shooting target area is an area surrounded by thick broken lines on the left side and the lower side of the effect display device 709. In the shooting target area on the left side of the effect display device 709, there is a star-shaped shooting mark 701C near the center of the area. When shooting the shooting target area on the left side of the effect display device 709, there is a range for aligning the shooting mark 701C at the center of the screen so as to overlap the image shot by the camera unit 190 and displayed on the display unit 140. It is displayed on the display unit 140.

  Further, in the shooting target area below the effect display device 709, there is a star-shaped shooting mark 701D just above the variable winning ball apparatus 715 near the center of the area. When shooting the lower shooting target area of the effect display device 709, a range for aligning the shooting mark 701D with the center of the screen over the image shot by the camera unit 190 and displayed on the display unit 140. Is displayed on the display unit 140.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an aspect when the player takes a picture of the shooting target area of the pachinko gaming machine 700A in the second embodiment. Referring to FIG. 52, when shooting the shooting target area on the left side of effect display device 709, the player holds portable terminal 100 at a position where the shooting target area can be shot from the front of pachinko gaming machine 700. Then, the holding position is finely adjusted so that the photographing mark 701C matches the range or mark for matching the photographing mark 701C.

  Further, when shooting the shooting target area on the lower side of the effect display device 709, the player can carry the shooting target area at a position where the shooting target area can be shot by looking into the variable winning ball device 715 of the pachinko gaming machine 700 from diagonally above. The terminal 100 is held, and the holding position is finely adjusted so that the shooting mark 701D matches the range or mark for matching the shooting mark 701D.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing for acquiring specific information executed by the mobile terminal 100 and the information providing server 200 in the second embodiment. Referring to FIG. 52, the processing from step S101 to step S103 is the same as the processing of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 44, and therefore, overlapping description will not be repeated.

  When it is determined that the positions of the shooting marks 701C and 701D are within the specified range with respect to the range for aligning the shooting marks 701C and 701D (when YES is determined in step S103), data is stored in step S104A. The processing unit 110 controls the camera unit 190 so that the arrangement state of the trajectory changing member (for example, a nail, a windmill, a stage, and a warp) in the imaging target region is captured as a still image and stored in the storage unit 120. . Next, in step S <b> 107 </ b> A, the wireless communication unit 160 is controlled to transmit the shooting data stored in the storage unit 120 to the information providing server 200.

  54 to 56 are first to third diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the mobile terminal 100 in the second embodiment. Referring to FIGS. 54 to 56, for FIGS. 54 and 55, image data of an image as shown on the left screen of the drawing is transmitted to information providing server 200. With respect to FIG. 56, image data of an image as shown in the upper screen of the figure is transmitted to the information providing server 200.

  Returning to FIG. 53, in the information providing server 200, the same processing of step S201 as in the first embodiment is executed. If it is determined that the imaging data has been received (YES in step S201), in step S203A, the data processing unit 210 analyzes the characteristics of the arrangement state of the trajectory changing member from the received imaging data.

  For example, in the case of the imaging target region on the left side of the effect display device 709 of FIG. 51, the arrangement state of the track changing members such as the nail 702 and the windmill 703 is in the direction of the first start winning port 713 or the second starting winning port 714. It is analyzed whether or not the ball is in an arrangement state in which the ball is directed. In this case, the case where the analysis result is good is a case where the pachinko ball is directed in the direction of the first start winning opening 713 or the second starting winning opening 714. The case where the analysis result is bad is a case where the pachinko balls are not arranged in the direction of the first start winning opening 713 or the second starting winning opening 714.

  Further, in the case of the imaging target area on the lower side of the effect display device 709 of FIG. 51, whether or not the arrangement state of the trajectory changing members of the nails 702A and 702B is an arrangement state in which a pachinko ball is likely to enter the first start winning opening 713. Analyze.

  Referring again to FIG. 56, in this case, the case where the analysis result is good is an arrangement state in which the nails 702A and 702B are equally wide on the left and right, as shown in the left diagram in the middle of FIG. Is the case. In addition, the case where the analysis result is bad means that the nail 702A, 702B is arranged in an uneven manner as shown in the middle diagram in the middle of FIG. 56, or the right side of the middle of FIG. As shown in the figure, this is a case where the nails 702A and 70B are arranged in a narrowed state.

  Next, Step S204 and Step S205 in the information providing server 200 and Step S111 and Step S112 in the mobile terminal 100 are the same as the processing in FIG. 44 of the first embodiment, and thus the overlapping description is repeated. Absent.

  The image displayed in step S112 in the second embodiment will be described. Referring to FIG. 54 again, in the case of the shooting target area on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 51, the pachinko ball is placed in the direction of the first start winning opening 713 or the second starting winning opening 714. Therefore, an image indicating that the analysis result is good and that the analysis result is good (in this case, an image where the character says “Nice!”) Is superimposed on the image of the shooting target area. Is displayed.

  Referring to FIG. 55 again, in the case of the shooting target region on the left side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 51, the pachinko ball is placed in the direction of the first start winning opening 713 or the second starting winning opening 714. Since the analysis result is judged to be bad, an image indicating that the analysis result is bad (in this case, an image in which the character says “Do your best!”) Is displayed superimposed on the image in the shooting target area. The

  Referring again to FIG. 56, in the case of the imaging target region on the lower side of the effect display device 709 in FIG. 51, the nails 702A and 702B are equally wide on the left and right as shown in the left diagram in the middle of FIG. In such an arrangement state, the analysis result is judged to be good, and an image indicating that the analysis result is good (here, an image in which the character says “Nice!”) Overlaid and displayed.

  As shown in the middle diagram in the middle of FIG. 56, the nail 702A, 702B is arranged in an unevenly widened state, or as shown in the right diagram in the middle of FIG. 56, the nail 702A, 70B. If the arrangement state is narrow, an analysis result is judged to be bad, and an image indicating that the analysis result is bad (in this case, an image in which the character says “Do your best!”) Is displayed overlaid on the image.

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.

  (1) In the above-described embodiment, the position of the track changing member such as the nail 702 and the windmill 703 and the inclination of the track changing member such as the nail 702A and 702B are analyzed as the arrangement state of the track changing member. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relative position of the trajectory changing member may be analyzed.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the arrangement state of the trajectory changing member in the portion through which the pachinko ball often passes is analyzed, and the specific information according to the analysis result is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arrangement state of the orbital change member in the portion where the pachinko balls do not pass so much is analyzed, and information indicating whether it is the recommended table for today as specific information according to the analysis result May be determined. As a result, it is possible to give significance to parts such as the track changing member that have not been so significant in the past, and as a result, it is possible to make the player interested in such parts.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the specific information is determined according to the analysis result of only one imaging target region. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the analysis information of a plurality of imaging target regions may be compared, and the specific information may be determined according to the comparison result.

  For example, the analysis results of the left and right imaging target areas of the effect display device 709 are compared, and according to the comparison result, which player is more likely to guide the pachinko ball to the start winning opening is determined by the player. Information for informing the user may be determined as specific information.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the mobile terminal 100 transmits the shooting data to the information providing server 200, and the information providing server 200 analyzes the shooting data and specifies specific information (for example, an image) corresponding to the analysis result. ) Is determined, and the determined specific information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 100, and the mobile terminal 100 outputs (for example, displays) the transmitted specific information. In this case, an application program for executing the image acquisition / display process shown in FIG. 53 is downloaded to the mobile terminal 100 in advance.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mobile terminal 100 analyzes the captured data, transmits the analysis result to the information providing server 200, and the information providing server 200 determines the specific information corresponding to the analysis result. The specific information may be transmitted to the mobile terminal 100, and the mobile terminal 100 may output (for example, display) the transmitted specific information. Further, the mobile terminal 100 may analyze the shooting data, determine specific information corresponding to the analysis result, and output the determined specific information.

  In these cases, an application program for executing these functions, data for analysis, and data for specific information are downloaded to the mobile terminal 100 in advance. In the latter case, all processes for outputting specific information can be performed only by the portable terminal 100 without accessing the information providing server 220.

  (5) The first and second embodiments described above are not limited to payout-type gaming machines that pay out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses and gives a score in response to detection of a winning ball.

  Specifically, in the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the game ball (which may be a rental ball) that the player has paid out is launched into the game area. Although it was a gaming machine to be performed, a game score for use in a game is given using the number of game values of the size specified by the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card In addition, the present invention is also applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using the given game score or the game score given by winning a game. Can be applied.

In other words, after the game medium (game ball) passes through the start area, based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display, a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner and a display result is derived. A game machine that includes a variable display device for displaying, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, the game machine shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to a player. A game ball encapsulated in the gaming machine is used to play the game area, and the game score is subtracted in response to the game ball being driven, and the game ball wins the winning area provided in the game area. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds game scores accordingly. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the specific information corresponding to the shot image of the shooting target area of the pachinko gaming machine 700 is determined. In the third embodiment, the specific information is determined according to the captured image of the imaging target area of the slot machine.

  Since the configuration of the gaming system 10 and the configuration and functions of the mobile terminal 100 and the information providing server 200 are the same as those described in the first embodiment, repeated description will not be repeated. Hereinafter, in the third embodiment, an outline of the configuration and functions of the slot machine 800 and processing for providing specific information will be described.

[Configuration and Function of Slot Machine 800]
Hereinafter, the configuration and function of the slot machine 800 will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 57 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine 800 according to this embodiment. FIG. 58 shows the internal structure of the slot machine 800. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols on each reel constituting the variable display device 802. FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the control circuit of the slot machine 800. The slot machine 800 includes a housing 801a whose front surface is open, and a front door 801b that is pivotally supported at a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 801a of the slot machine 800, reels 802L, 802C, and 802R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. 57, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 803 provided on the front door 801b.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the outer periphery of each of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R has “melon (for example, the design of the area number 20 of the left reel 802L)” and “banana (for example, the area number 19 of the left reel 802L). ”,“ White 7 (for example, the design of area number 18 on the left reel 802L) ”,“ Black BAR (for example, the design of area number 17 on the left reel 802L) ”,“ Star (for example, on the left reel 802L) “Region No. 14 design”, “Grape (eg, design of region No. 13 on the left reel 802L)”, “Black 7 (eg design of region No. 10 on the left reel 802L)”, “White BAR (eg left Reel 802L area number 6 symbol) "," strawberry (for example, left reel 802L area number 5 symbol) "," star 7 (for example, left reel 802L area) Symbol) multiple kinds can be distinguished from one another such "symbol number 1 is depicted in a predetermined order, one by 21, respectively.

  The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 803. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R are drawn are white and transmit light with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also depend on the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 802L, 802C, and 802R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 832L, 832C, and 832R (see FIGS. 58 and 60), so that the symbols of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R are displayed on the see-through window 803. In addition to being displayed while changing continuously, by stopping the rotation of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 803 as display results.

  Inside the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R, reel sensors 833L, 833C, and 833R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R, and reels that irradiate light from the back of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R LED855 is provided.

  The reel LED 855 can individually irradiate three consecutive symbols on each of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R. The reel LED 855 emits light to the symbol, and the reels 802L, 802C, 802R and the symbol which can be visually recognized from the see-through window 803 depending on the irradiation mode (lighting, blinking, extinguishing, emission color, etc.) The visibility, that is, the visibility of the transparent window 803 can be changed. In this embodiment, an example in which the reel LED 855 can irradiate light of one color (for example, white light) will be described. ).

  The front door 801b uses a medal insertion portion 804 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 809 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) within that range. The MAXBET switch 806 operated when setting a predetermined number of bets determined according to the state, the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bets are settled (setting of credits and bets) A check switch 810 that is operated when a game is started, a start switch 807 that is operated when a game is started, and a stop that is operated when rotation of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R is stopped. The switch 808L, 808C, 808R, and the effect switch 856 for use by the effect are provided by the player. It is provided operably respectively.

  In the present embodiment, “2” is determined as the specified number of bets according to the fact that the gaming state is a big bonus and a regular bonus (hereinafter also referred to as bonus), and the gaming state is a big bonus and a regular bonus. “3” is determined in accordance with a game state other than (hereinafter also referred to as a general game or a general game state).

  The front door 801b is provided with a game display unit 813 for notifying information related to the game. The game display unit 813 displays a credit indicator 811 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game auxiliary indicator 812, 1BETLED 814 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 815 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 and 2 lights that the bet number is set by 3 3BETLED 816 for notifying, insertion request LED 817 for notifying that a medal can be inserted is lit, start effective LED 818 for notifying that the start operation of the game by operating the start switch 807 is lit, weight (previous game start) Since a certain period of time has not elapsed since Weight in LED819 for notifying by lighting the fact is in state) waiting, replay in LED820 for notifying by lighting the effect that while replaying the game to be described later is provided a.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 806, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 821 (see FIG. 60) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the MAXBET switch 806 is valid, and stop switches 808L, 808C, Inside the 808R, left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 822L, 822C, and 822R (see FIG. 60) for notifying that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R is valid are provided. It has been.

  As shown in FIG. 60, a reset switch 823 for detecting an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later by a predetermined key operation and a reset operation for releasing a stop state described later is provided inside the front door 801b. , A setting value display 824 that displays the setting value at that time during the setting value change or confirmation of the setting value, which will be described later, a stop state at the end of BB described later (the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) A stop switch 836a for selecting the validity / invalidity of the stop function to be controlled to be automatically controlled at the end of the BB, which will be described later (the medal stored as a credit is adjusted regardless of the player's operation) The automatic settlement switch 836b for selecting whether the automatic settlement function to be controlled is to be enabled or disabled, and the flow of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 804 Is switched from a flow path switching solenoid 830 and a medal insertion portion 804 for selectively switching to either the hopper tank 834a (see FIG. 58) side or the medal payout outlet 809 side provided in the housing 801a. A medal selector (not shown) having an insertion medal sensor 831 for detecting a medal that has flowed down to the hopper tank 834a side, and a door open detection switch 825 (see FIG. 60) for detecting the open state of the front door 801b are provided.

  Inside the casing 801a, reel sensors 833L, 833C, and 833R that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R, the reel motors 832L, 832C, and 832R, and the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R, respectively (see FIG. 60). , A reel unit 802 including reel LEDs 855, an external output board 8000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 834a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 804, and a medal payout opening for medals stored in the hopper tank 834a A hopper unit 834 including a hopper motor 834b for paying out from 809, a payout sensor 834c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 834b, and a power supply box 8100 are provided.

  An overflow tank 835 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 834a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 834. The overflow tank 835 is provided with a full sensor 835a made up of a pair of conductive members spaced from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals. The conductive member is an overflow tank 835. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front of the power supply box 8100 functions as a setting key switch 837 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, and as a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. In the mode, there is provided a reset / setting switch 838 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery described later, and a power switch 839 that is operated when the power is turned ON / OFF. It has been.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 800, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 804, or a bet number is set using a credit. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 806 may be operated.

  When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the corresponding lines of the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 57) become valid, and the operation of the start switch 807 is valid, that is, the game Is ready to start.

  The winning line is a line that is set in advance to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed in the see-through window 803 of each reel 802L, 802C, 802R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, four types of winning lines L1 to L4 are defined as winning lines.

  The winning line L1 is a winning line set across symbols arranged in the middle stage of the reel 802L, the middle stage of the reel 802C, the middle stage of the reel 802R, that is, the middle stage. The winning line L2 refers to a winning line set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 802C, the upper stage of the reel 802R, that is, the upper stage. The winning line L3 is a winning line set across symbols arranged in the upper stage of the reel 802L, the middle stage of the reel 802C, the lower stage of the reel 802R, that is, lower right. The winning line L4 is a winning line that is set across the symbols arranged in the lower stage of the reel 802L, the middle stage of the reel 802C, the upper stage of the reel 802R, that is, the upper right. The winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L4, and may include, for example, a line straddling symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 802L, 802C, 802R.

  When a specified number of bets are set in the general gaming state other than the big bonus and the regular bonus, the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 57) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 807 is effective. The game can be started. When a predetermined number of bets are set when the bonus is a big bonus and a regular bonus, the pay lines L2 to L4 are valid and the game can be started.

  When the start switch 807 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 802L, 802C, and 802R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 803.

  Then, when all the reels 802L, 802C, 802R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 802L, 802C, When it stops as a display result of 802R, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout exit 809 (see FIG. 57).

  If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game (in this embodiment, 12), and if the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 802L, 802C, 802R on the activated pay line, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. It has become.

  Further, in the slot machine 800 in the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 802L, 802C, 802R rotate and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R stop rotating and the symbols are displayed in a stopped manner. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R to the stop of rotation of the corresponding reels 802L, 802C, 802R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 802L, 802C, 802R rotate 80 times per minute and change 80x21 (number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so a maximum of 4 symbols can be drawn in 190ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of the symbols, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 802L, 802C, 802R, when any one of the stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed in the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the slot machine 800 is provided with a game control board 840, an effect control board 890, and a power supply board 8101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 840, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 890. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 8101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 800 and supplies it to each part.

  The power supply board 8101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 800 is generated from the AC100V power supply, and the game control board 840 and the game control board 840 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 890 connected via.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 834b, payout sensor 834c, full sensor 835a, setting key switch 837, reset / setting switch 838, and power switch 839 are connected to the power supply board 8101.

  The game control board 840 includes a MAXBET switch 806, a start switch 807, stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R, a settlement switch 810, a reset switch 823, a stop switch 836a, an automatic settlement switch 836b, an insertion medal sensor 831, a door opening detection switch 825, reel sensors 833L, 833C, and 833R are connected, and a payout sensor 834c, a full sensor 835a, a setting key switch 837, and a reset / setting switch 838 are connected via the power supply board 8101. Detection signals of switches are input.

  In addition, the game control board 840 includes a credit indicator 811, a game auxiliary indicator 812, 1-3 BET LEDs 814-816, a turn-on request LED 817, a start valid LED 818, a waiting LED 819, a replaying LED 820, a BET switch valid LED 821, left, middle , Right stop valid LEDs 822L, 822C, 822R, set value display 824, flow path switching solenoid 830, reel motors 832L, 832C, 832R are connected, and the above-mentioned hopper motor 834b is connected via the power supply board 8101. These electric components are driven based on the control of a main control unit 841 (described later) mounted on the game control board 840.

  The game control board 840 is composed of a microcomputer having a main CPU 841a, ROM 841b, RAM 841c, and I / O port 841d. A main control unit 841 for controlling the game, a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Random number circuit 842 that generates a random number, pulse oscillator 843 that supplies a clock signal having a constant frequency to random number circuit 842, and detection signals input from switches connected to game control board 840 directly or via power supply board 8101 are detected. A switch detection circuit 844, a motor drive circuit 845 that controls the drive of the reel motors 832L, 832C, and 832R, a solenoid drive circuit 846 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 830, various displays connected to the game control board 840, L for LED drive control D drive circuit 847, power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 800, and when a voltage drop is detected, an interruption detection circuit 848 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 841, power supply A reset circuit 849 for providing a reset signal to the main CPU 841a at the time of input or when an initialization command from the main CPU 841a is not input, and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 841a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 841b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 840 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 841b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 841a and various tables. The RAM 841c is used as a work area when the main CPU 841a executes a program. The I / O port 841d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 841.

  The main control unit 841 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 841c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 841a repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 840 is changed as the basic process, and stepwise according to the change of the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to move to. Further, the main CPU 841a has an interrupt function as described above, and is capable of interrupting the basic process by executing the interrupt and executing the interrupt process, and the voltage output from the power interruption detection circuit 848. The power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed in response to the input of the decrease signal, and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repetition of the process depending on the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 841 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 849 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 841 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 841 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 841. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 841, that is, when the main control unit 841 does not operate for a certain time, the main control unit 841 The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 841.

  The main CPU 841a transmits various commands to the effect control board 890 via the I / O port 841d. A command transmitted from the game control board 840 to the effect control board 890 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 890 to the game control board 840. A transmission line for commands transmitted from the game control board 840 to the effect control board 890 includes a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 880. The game control board 840 and the effect control board 890 are not directly connected.

  The production control board 890 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 851 (see FIG. 57), production effect LED 852, speakers 853 and 854, and reel LED 855 arranged on the front door 801b of the slot machine 800. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 891 described later mounted on the effect control board 890. In addition, an effect switch 856 is connected to the effect control board 890, and a detection signal of the effect switch 856 is input.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 891 mounted on the effect control board 890 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 851, effect effect LED 852, speakers 853 and 854, and reel LED 855. However, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 890 or another board separately from the sub control part 891, and the sub control part 891 is based on a command from the main control part 841. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 891. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 891 and the output are controlled. The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the control units.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 851, the rendering effect LED 852, the speakers 853 and 854, and the reel LED 855 are exemplified as the rendering device, but the rendering device is not limited to these, and is mechanically driven, for example. A display device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the rendering device.

  The effect control board 890 includes a sub CPU 891a, a ROM 891b, a RAM 891c, and an I / O port 891d as well as the main control part 841, and includes a sub control unit 891 for effect control, and an effect control board 890. A display control circuit 892 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 851 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 893 for controlling driving of the effect LED 852 and the reel LED 855, and an audio output circuit 894 for controlling audio output from the speakers 853 and 854, When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 891a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 895 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 891a and a detection signal input from the effect switch 856 connected to the effect control board 890 are detected. Switch detection times 896, a clock device 897 for outputting time information including date information and time information, and a power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 800 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal indicating that is sent to the sub CPU 891a. In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 840, the sub CPU 891a performs various controls for performing effects. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 890 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 841a, the sub CPU 891a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). One of the interrupt terminals of the sub control unit 891 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 841 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the sub CPU 891a receives the strobe signal. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 841 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub CPU 891a executes a timer interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. One of the interrupt terminals of the sub-control unit 891 is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 898, and the sub CPU 891a responds to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 898. Execute processing (sub). Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the sub CPU 891a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  The sub control unit 891 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 891c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 800, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, when the power of the slot machine 800 is in an ON state, it is necessary to turn it OFF once, and after the setting key switch 837 is turned ON, the power of the slot machine 800 needs to be turned ON. When the setting key switch 837 is turned on and the power is turned on, 1 is displayed on the setting value display 824 as the initial value of the setting value, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 838. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 838 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 824 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 807 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 841c of the main control unit 841. Then, when the setting key switch 837 is turned OFF, the game shifts to a state where the game can be started by setting the bet number. It should be noted that when the power of the slot machine 800 is in an ON state, an operation for temporarily turning it OFF, an operation for turning the power of the slot machine 800 after the setting key switch 837 is turned ON, an operation of the reset / setting switch 838, An operation necessary for setting the set value, such as an operation of the start switch 807 for confirming the set value, is referred to as a setting change operation. The setting change operation is not limited to such an operation, and may be any operation as long as it is an operation for setting a setting value.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 837 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. In this situation, when the setting key switch 837 is turned ON, the setting value read from the RAM 841c is displayed on the setting value display 824, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and when the setting key switch 837 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 800 in the present embodiment, when the main CPU 841a detects a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 848, a power interruption processing (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the registers are saved in a stack of a RAM 841c, which will be described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is set to 1, that is, specific data other than 0 are stored in the RAM 841c. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 841c. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in the respective bits of the corresponding area of the RAM 841c. For this reason, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 841c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 841c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main CPU 841a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 841c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis The processing state of the main CPU 841a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 841c on the condition that the value of the data for use is correct, but the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or is destroyed. If the value of the diagnostic data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state so that the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 823 or the reset / setting switch 838 is operated, and a new setting value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 841c is retained by the backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and when the main CPU 841a determines that the data in the RAM 841c is normal when the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 841c, but only the data necessary for returning to the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 841c, and the power is turned on. It is good also as a structure which returns to the control state before a power failure based on the data backed up in.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore all the states of the input ports to the state before power interruption.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 891a detects the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 898, the sub CPU 891a executes a power interruption interrupt process (sub). In the power interruption processing (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 891c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 891c, and data stored in all areas of the RAM 891c The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on 0 becomes 0 and stored in the RAM 891c.

  Then, the sub CPU 891a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 891c at the time of activation, and based on the data stored in the RAM 891c on condition that the RAM parity is 0. The processing state of the sub CPU 891a is restored to the state before the power interruption, but if the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM 891c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main sub CPU 891a, only the RAM 891c is initialized and the execution of the performance is not disabled.

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 891c is retained by the backup power supply even during a power failure, and the sub CPU 891a determines that the data in the RAM 891c is normal when the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 891c, but only the data required to return to the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 891c, and the power is turned on. It is good also as a structure which returns to the control state before a power failure based on the data backed up in.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player It is only necessary to restore the state of the input port, and it is not necessary to restore the state of the input port or the progress in the case where the production is interrupted in the middle to the state before the power interruption. For example, while backing up only data indicating the gaming state such as whether it is in the BB, the normal gaming state, or RT1 to RT4, an effect corresponding to the gaming state (if it is in the BB, the effect during the BB, the normal game) If a power outage occurs during the execution of a specific performance (such as a small role announcement) if it is in a state, it will not resume the specific performance that was being performed at the next power-on. Instead, an effect corresponding to the gaming state being backed up when the power is turned on may be executed from the beginning.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 841c of the main control unit 841 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 841c of the main control unit 841 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient when it is initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 841d, and a game time clock counter. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a winning flag that is initialized at the end of each game (small role, replay , SB) and a winning flag are stored.

  Special work, data for sending commands to the production control board 890, various software random numbers, etc., data that is initialized only before the start of setting, at the time of winning and setting change without being cleared at the end of each game Winning flag (big bonus, regular bonus) that is initialized at the time (when changing to the setting change mode), gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state of the next game, the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games This is a work in which the number of remaining games is stored when the game state is controlled to end. In the special work, an example in which the number of remaining games is stored will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games digested after being controlled in the gaming state may be stored.

  The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored.

  When the mode is changed to the setting change mode (that is, when the setting change operation is performed), the gaming state flag is updated to information related to the normal gaming state described later in principle. Thus, for example, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during RT or bonus, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the mode is changed to the setting change mode. In addition, when the bonus winning flag is set for the special work and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the winning flag is initialized. For example, when a transition is made to the setting change mode during the internal RT in which the bonus is won, the normal gaming state is controlled. In this way, in association with the setting change, the gaming state flag is rewritten to a value corresponding to the normal gaming state (initialization).

  The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 832L, 832C, and 832R is stored. When the reel motors 832L, 832C, and 832R are stopped, data indicating the stop phase is stored. The Rukoto. The non-saved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 841c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 841c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied.

  The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 841a is stored, and the unused stack area among them is, as with the unused area, any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 841a is activated when both the setting key switch 837 and the reset / setting switch 838 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 837 is ON. At the end of BB, when the setting key switch 837 and the reset / setting switch 838 are both OFF and the data in the RAM 841c is not destroyed, the six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is initialization performed when both the setting key switch 837 and the reset / setting switch 838 are ON at the time of start-up and is shifted to the setting change mode, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. Yes, in initialization 0, all areas (unused area and unused area) of the storage area of the RAM 841c except the used stack area and the area where the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored (Including the stack area) is initialized and controlled to the normal gaming state.

  Initialization 1 is initialization performed when only the setting key switch 837 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and is shifted to the setting change mode. In initialization 1, the stack in use in the storage area of the RAM 841c. The area, the area in which the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored, and all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the stop phase work are initialized.

  Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 841c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when both the setting key switch 837 and the reset / setting switch 838 are OFF at the time of startup, and the data in the RAM 841c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 841c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, an example in which initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed at the end of the setting change mode will be described. However, the first game before the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, or after the setting change is performed. May be performed until the start is started (until the start switch 807 is operated). In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  In the slot machine 800 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 802. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game status, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bets. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag for the winning combination in the RAM 841c.

[Winnings, transition of gaming state]
FIG. 61A is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations, and FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to a symbol combination and a special appearance. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 841.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the slot machine 800 in the present embodiment, the main control unit 841 has a normal gaming state, RT1 to RT4 in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is improved from the normal gaming state, and an internal medium RT, In addition, the bonus is controlled to either a big bonus or a regular bonus in which the winning probability of the small role is improved until the predetermined number is paid out. Further, in slot machine 800 in the present embodiment, sub-control unit 891 can control the effect state during an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect for notifying the internal lottery result can be executed. ing.

  Referring to FIG. 61 (a), three types of big bonuses 1 to 3 (hereinafter, each big bonus is also referred to as BB) and regular bonus (hereinafter, regular bonuses are designated as RB) Also referred to as).

  BB1 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. BB2 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB3 is awarded when a combination of “star 7-star 7-star 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  When winning one of BB1 to BB3, the big bonus is controlled. While the gaming state is controlled to the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of the winning BB is set in the RAM 841c. Further, while being controlled by the big bonus, the RB is controlled to the RB for BB which has been improved to the predetermined probability of the small role. While being controlled to RB for BB, the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 841c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the game is controlled so that the regular bonus medium flag is set to the ON state for each game.

  The big bonus generated due to winning of BB1 or BB2 ends on condition that 361 or more medals have been paid out. The big bonus generated due to the winning of BB3 ends on condition that 241 or more medals have been paid out.

  The RB is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Black 7-Star 7” or “Star 7-Star 7-Black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. When winning an RB, the regular bonus is controlled. While the gaming state is controlled to the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 841c. The regular bonus generated due to the winning of the RB is terminated on the condition that any winning combination is won four times.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the game state is controlled to the inside RT from when BB1 to BB3 and RB are internally won until winning. In the internal RT, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 62, after BB1 to BB3 and RB are finished, the gaming state is controlled by RT1.

  Even if one of BB1 to BB3 and RB is won in the internal lottery, if the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R are not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, they will win these roles. There is nothing. The symbols constituting “BB1” to “BB3” and “RB” (“black 7”, “white 7”, “star 7”) are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 802L, the middle reel 802C, and the right reel 802R. Because. Note that when any of BB1 to BB3 and RB is won in the internal lottery, the winning flag of the bonus is carried over until the winning bonus is won. Specifically, the bonus winning flag is deleted when a bonus is won in a winning determination process described later.

  SB is awarded when a combination of “star-black 7-star” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When winning the SB, the winning combination of the small role (for example, melon 1) is controlled to a single bonus that is a gaming state in which the winning probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state. While being controlled by the single bonus, the single bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 841c. The single bonus generated due to the winning of SB ends when the game is played once.

  When the SB is won when the normal gaming state is controlled to any one of RT1 and RT3 and one game as a single bonus resulting from the winning is completed, the gaming state is controlled by RT2. On the other hand, after being controlled by RT4 and winning a SB, and one game as a single bonus resulting from the winning is completed, the control continues to RT4 before the SB winning. The single bonus ends in one game. For this reason, in FIG. 62, the single bonus is not shown, but when the SB winning is made while being controlled to one of the normal gaming state, RT1, and RT3, the single bonus is once controlled to RT2. When the SB is won while being controlled and controlled by RT4, it is once controlled to single bonus but again controlled by RT4. In the following, for the sake of convenience, each of RT2 and RT4 will be described as a gaming state that conceptually includes a single bonus due to SB winning, but in practice, after being controlled to a single bonus by SB winning as described above, It means that it is controlled to RT2 or RT4 according to the gaming state at the time of the SB winning.

  Even if the SB is won in the internal lottery, if the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R are not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, they will not win these roles. This is because the symbols (“star”, “black 7”) constituting the SB are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 802L, the middle reel 802C, and the right reel 802R.

  In a game where SB is won in the internal lottery, when the SB is not won, unlike the BB1 to BB3 and RB, the winning flag of the SB is deleted. Also, in the internal lottery, when the SB winning is not performed at the timing of winning the SB in the game and the symbol combination of the SB cannot be drawn on the winning line, the special outcome shown in FIG. 61 (b) is won. The reel control is performed so as to be drawn into any of the lines L1 to L4.

  Next, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small combination includes a single combination, grape, melon 1 to melon 4, and strawberry.

  One of the small roles is awarded when a combination of “star-black BAR-black 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When one winning combination wins, one medal is paid out. Even if the winning combination is won, if the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R are not operated at an appropriate timing, no winning will be won. This is because the symbols (“star”, “black BAR”, and “black 7”) that make up one winning combination are not arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 802L to the right reel 802R.

  Among the small roles, grapes are awarded when a combination of “grape-grape-grape” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Even if the grape is won, the grapes will not be won unless the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R are operated at an appropriate timing. This is because the symbols constituting the grape (“grape”) are not arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 802L to the right reel 802R.

  Of the small roles, melon 1 is awarded when a combination of “any-melon-any” or “melon-black BAR-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. For this reason, the melon 1 can be awarded regardless of the combination of the symbols of the left reel 802L and the right reel 802R when the symbol “melon” of the middle reel 802C is stopped and displayed on the valid winning line. It can be said that it is a winning role.

  Melon 1 wins regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R if they are elected. This is because the symbols constituting the melon 1 (for example, “melon”) are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 802C.

  Next, melons 2 to 4 will be described. Melon 2 is awarded when a combination of “white BAR−white 7−black BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Melon 3 wins when a combination of “white BAR-black BAR-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Melon 4 is awarded when a combination of “white BAR−black BAR−black BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines.

  Here, referring to FIG. 59, the symbols constituting each of melons 2 to 4 are not arranged within 5 frames in each of left reel 802L to right reel 802R. For this reason, even if one of the melons 2 to 4 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 808L, 808C, 808R is not operated at an appropriate timing to be able to win these roles, it will be won. Of the melons 2-4, you won't win the winning melon.

  However, as will be described later, melons 2 to 4 are always read out as a lottery winning combination at the same time as melon 1 except for the big bonus. For this reason, when the melons 2 to 4 are won, the melon 1 can be won except during the big bonus.

  Among the small roles, strawberry is one of the winning lines: “strawberry-white 7-banana”, “strawberry-black 7-banana”, “strawberry-star 7-banana”, and “strawberry-grape-banana” Wins when any combination is complete. Even if the strawberry is won, the strawberry will not be won unless the stop switch 808L is operated at an appropriate timing. This is because the symbol (“strawberry”) of the left reel 802L constituting the strawberry is not arranged within five frames on the left reel 802L.

  When the player is in the general gaming state and is not controlled by the AT, the player can prevent the strawberry from being dropped by stopping the operation according to the operation procedure for winning the strawberry, and for example, from the symbol arrangement of the left reel 802L It is possible to prevent the SB from being controlled by RT2 by losing the SB without pulling in the “star” which is the left symbol constituting the SB.

  Next, the number of medals to be paid out when winning one of grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries will be described. When winning one of grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries, medals are paid out according to the gaming state and the number of winning lines when the winning game is started.

  In the general game state, when a prize is awarded to any of grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries, four medals are paid out. On the other hand, when a prize different from grapes, melons 1 to 4 and strawberries is won in a bonus different from the general gaming state, eight medals are paid out.

  The winning lines L1, L3, and L4 intersect at the middle stage of the middle reel 802C. Further, “any-melon-any” of melon 1 can be awarded only from the stop symbol of the middle reel 802C. Therefore, the melon 1 can be said to be a winning combination that can occur in a plurality of winning lines. For this reason, when the melon 1 wins melon 1 by stopping “any-melon-any”, the number of medals corresponding to the number of winning lines is paid out. For example, when the “melon” of the middle reel 802C is stopped in the middle stage, in the general gaming state, the winning lines L1, L3, and L4 are won, so 4 × 3 = 12 medals are paid out and the bonus is won. Since winning is made on the lines L3 and L4, 8 × 2 = 16 and 12 medals at the upper limit of payout are paid out.

  Next, among the winning combinations, the replaying combination will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replay combination includes replay 1 to replay 11. When you win one of the re-players, you will not be paid out medals, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets corresponding to the number of bets that you no longer need to set in the next game This is essentially the same as when medals are paid out.

  Replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the normal replay (“banana”) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 802L to the right reel 802R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 1 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 808L to 808R if it is won. Since Replay 1 is a normal replay that does not involve RT transition even when winning, and maintains the current gaming state, it is also referred to as a normal rep in the following.

  Replay 2 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The symbols (“banana” and “melon”) constituting the replay 2 are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 802L to the right reel 802R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 2 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 808L to 808R if it is won.

  As shown in FIG. 62, after winning the replay 2 in the normal gaming state, the RT3 is controlled to have a higher replay winning probability than the normal gaming state. For this reason, the replay 2 is also referred to as a promotion lip below. As will be described later, Replay 2 is set not to win in the internal lottery in RT1 or RT2, and is set to win in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state with a predetermined probability. For this reason, RT1 and RT2 do not win Replay 2. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled directly from RT1 or RT2 to RT3, and is controlled to RT3 by winning the replay 2 after being controlled to the normal gaming state.

  It should be noted that even when the game state is other than the normal game state (for example, RT1 or RT2), the replay 2 can be drawn and won with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%). You may comprise so that it may be controlled by RT3 also from a game state.

  Replay 3 is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-white 7” or “banana-banana-strawberry” is arranged in any of the winning lines. The left symbol and the middle symbol (“banana”) constituting the replay 3 are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 802L and the middle reel 802C, and the right symbol (“white 7” and “strawberry” constituting the replay 3 are arranged. ") Is arranged within 5 frames in the right reel 802R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 3 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 808L to 808R if it is won.

  As shown in FIG. 62, after winning the replay 3 in RT3, the control is made to RT4 in which the replay winning probability is further improved as compared to RT3. For this reason, the replay 3 is also referred to as a rush lip below. As will be described later, the replay 3 is set not to win in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state, RT1, and RT2, and is set to win with a predetermined probability in the internal lottery in RT3. For this reason, the replay 3 is not won in the normal gaming state, RT1, and RT2. As a result, it is configured not to be directly controlled by RT4 from the normal gaming state, RT1, and RT2, and is configured to be controlled by RT4 by winning the replay 3 after being controlled by RT3. .

  It should be noted that even when the game state is other than RT3 (for example, normal game state, RT1, and RT2), the replay 3 can be selected and won with a predetermined probability (very low probability, 1%). It may be configured to be controlled to the advantageous RT even from the gaming state.

  Once controlled to RT4, control to RT4 is maintained until 50 games are consumed unless a big bonus or regular bonus is won.

  Replay 4 is awarded when a combination of “melon-strawberry-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the replay 4 (“melon” and “strawberry”) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 802L to the right reel 802R. Therefore, in principle, the replay 4 can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 808L to 808R if it is won. As shown in FIG. 62, when winning a replay 4 at RT3, the game state is controlled to the normal game state. For this reason, the replay 4 is also referred to as a falling lip below.

  Replay 5 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR−black BAR−black BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The replay 6 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-black BAR-white 7” or “black BAR-black BAR-strawberry” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay 7 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-white 7-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay 8 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-banana-black BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines. Replay 9 is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-black BAR-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The replay 10 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The replay 11 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-star” is arranged on any of the winning lines.

  Since the replay 5 is a set of three black BARs, the replay 5 is also referred to as a BAR lip. Further, each of the replays 6 to 11 has two black BARs, that is, the black BARs are in a tempered state, and are also referred to as tempile a to tempile f.

  The symbols constituting each of the replays 5 to 11 include symbols that are not arranged within five frames in at least one or more reels. For this reason, even if one of the replays 5 to 11 is won in the internal lottery, no prize is won unless the stop switches 808L to 808R are operated at an appropriate timing.

  However, since the replays 5 to 11 are won simultaneously with other replays, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 808L to 808R, the symbols constituting any of the selected replays can be drawn into the winning line. it can. Therefore, in principle, the replays 5 to 11 may be unable to win even if they are won, but can be said to be a role that can win any replay.

  Next, the special appearance will be described with reference to FIG. The special item is “melon-strawberry-banana”. In this embodiment, the reel control for stopping at any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 in the present embodiment is that the symbols constituting the SB are displayed on the winning line when the SB is won in any gaming state. This is performed when the SB is missed.

  As shown in FIG. 62, after the special game stops in RT1 to RT3, the game is controlled to the normal gaming state. Even if the special game is stopped in RT4, it is not controlled to the normal gaming state. Even if the special game is stopped in the normal game state, the control to the normal game state is maintained.

[Combinations of lottery roles]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66, the combination of lottery object combinations and the number of determination values read out as the lottery object combination in the internal lottery will be described. In FIG. 63 to FIG. 66, “the name of the lottery subject” and the “combination of lottery subject” corresponding to the name are shown by the left two columns, and “gaming state” is shown from the left third column. It is shown. The numerical value in the column where the lottery target role intersects with the gaming state indicates that the lottery target role is read in the internal lottery when the lottery target role is in the gaming state, and indicates the number of determination values used in the internal lottery of the lottery target role. 63 to 66, for example, the number of determination values when the setting value is 1 is shown as the number of determination values, but the number of determination values when the setting value is 2 to 6 is also stored in the ROM 841b so as to be specified. In addition, a cross in the column where the lottery target role and the gaming state intersect indicates that the lottery target role is not read in the internal lottery when the lottery target role is in the gaming state, or is not won even if read. .

  The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” in correspondence with a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery target combination (weak strawberry 1 in the normal gaming state in FIG. 63) for which “413” is set as the number of determination values is 413/65536.

  Further, in the slot machine 800, a plurality of winning combinations can be simultaneously read out as the lottery target combination and can be won in duplicate. In the following, by indicating “+” between winning combinations, it indicates that they are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination in the internal lottery.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the lottery target combination and the number of determination values related to the special combination / small combination in the general gaming state.

  When the gaming state is one of the normal gaming state and RT1 to RT4, weak strawberry 1, weak strawberry 2, weak strawberry 3, weak strawberry 4, strong strawberry 1, strong strawberry 2, strong strawberry 3, strong strawberry 4 Push order melon 1, Push order melon 2, Push order melon 3, Push order melon 4, Push order melon 5, 12 sheets melon 1, 12 sheets melon 2, 12 sheets melon 3, 12 sheets melon 4, weak grapes 1, Weak grape 2, weak grape 3, weak grape 4, strong grape 1, strong grape 2, strong grape 3, strong grape 4, one piece 1, one piece 2, one piece 3, one piece 4, SB, RB, BB3, BB2, and BB1 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as subject for internal lottery. As described above, each of RT2 and RT4 conceptually includes a single bonus. The numerical value in parentheses in the figure indicates the number of determination values in the single bonus in which the number of determination values different from RT2 or RT4 is set.

  Weak strawberry 1 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry. The weak strawberry 2 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + RB. The weak strawberry 3 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + BB3. The weak strawberry 4 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + BB2. The strong strawberry 1 is a lottery target role for reading out a strawberry + 1 sheet role. The strong strawberry 2 refers to a lottery target role that reads strawberry + 1 sheet role + RB. The strong strawberry 3 refers to a lottery target role for reading strawberry + 1 sheet role + BB3. The strong strawberry 4 is a lottery target role that reads strawberry + 1 sheet combination + BB2.

  The push order melon 1 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 4. The push order melon 2 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 3. The push order melon 3 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 2. The pushing order melon 4 refers to a lottery target combination that reads out the melon 1. The pushing order melon 5 is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 1 + melon 3 + melon 4.

  The 12-sheet melon 1 means a lottery target role for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry. The 12-sheet melon 2 refers to a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry + RB. The 12-sheet melon 3 refers to a lottery target role for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry + BB3. The 12-sheet melon 4 is a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry + BB2.

  The weak grape 1 is a lottery target role for reading grapes. The weak grape 2 is a lottery target combination that reads grape + RB. The weak grape 3 is a lottery target combination that reads grape + BB3. The weak grape 4 refers to a lottery target combination that reads grape + BB2. The strong grape 1 is a lottery target combination that reads out the grape + 1 combination. The strong grape 2 refers to a lottery target combination that reads grape + 1 + 1 combination + RB. The strong grape 3 is a lottery target combination that reads grape + 1 combination + BB3. The strong grape 4 refers to a lottery target combination that reads grape + 1 sheet combination + BB2.

  One-piece combination 1 is a lottery target combination that reads out a single-piece combination. The one-piece combination 2 is a lottery target combination that reads out a single-piece combination + RB. The single winning combination 3 is a lottery target winning combination that reads out the single winning combination + BB3. The one-piece combination 4 is a lottery target combination that reads out the one-piece combination + BB2.

  When the game state is RT inside, weak strawberry 1, strong strawberry 1, push order melon 1, push order melon 2, push order melon 3, push order melon 4, push order melon 5, 12 sheets melon 1, weak grape 1, strong grape 1, and 1-sheet combination 1 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as targeted combinations for internal lottery.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the lottery target combination and the number of determination values related to the re-game combination in the general gaming state.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, normal replay, push order promotion replay 1, push order promotion replay 2, push order promotion replay 3, push order promotion replay 4, push order promotion replay 5, push order promotion replay 6, The BAR temporary play 1, the BAR temporary play 2, the BAR temporary play 3, the BAR temporary play 4, and the BAR replay are the targets of the internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as the target roles of the internal lottery.

  The normal replay refers to a lottery target role for reading a normal lip. The push order promotion replay 1 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + templipe e. The push order promotion replay 2 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + entry lip + temple lip e. The push order promotion replay 3 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + falling lip + temple lip e. The push order promotion replay 4 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + temp lip a + temp lip e. The push order promotion replay 5 is a lottery target combination that reads normal lip + promotion lip + temp lip b + temp lip e. The push order promotion replay 6 is a lottery target combination that reads out normal lip + promotion lip + templip lip c + temple lip e.

  The BAR temporary play 1 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + tempe lip a + tempe lip b + tempe lip c + tempe lip d + tempe lip e. The BAR temporary play 2 refers to a lottery target role for reading normal lip + templipa a + templipip b + templipip c + templipip d + templipip e + RB. The BAR temporary play 3 is a lottery target combination that reads out normal lip + tempe lip a + tempe lip b + tempe lip c + tempe lip d + tempe lip e + BB3. The BAR temporary play 4 is a lottery target combination for reading normal lip + templipa + tenpelipb + templipip c + templipip d + templipip e + BB2. The BAR replay is a lottery target combination that reads normal lip + BAR lip + templip lip a + templip lip b + templip lip c + temp lip d + temp lip e + temp lip f.

  When the gaming state is one of RT1, RT2, RT4, and internal RT, normal replay, BAR template play 1, BAR template play 2, BAR template play 3, BAR template play 4, and BAR replay are internal lotteries. It becomes a target and is sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery. As described above, each of RT2 and RT4 conceptually includes a single bonus.

  When the gaming state is RT3, normal replay, push order maintenance replay 1, push order maintenance replay 2, push order maintenance replay 3, push order maintenance replay 4, push order maintenance replay 5, push order entry replay 1, push order entry Replay 2, Push Order Entry Replay 3, Push Order Entry Replay 4, BAR Temper Replay 1, BAR Temper Replay 2, BAR Temper Replay 3, BAR Temper Replay 4, and BAR Replay are subject to internal lottery and are subject to internal lottery. Read sequentially.

  The push order maintenance replay 1 is a lottery target role that reads promotion lip + falling lip + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e. The push order maintaining replay 2 is a lottery target role for reading normal lip + promotion lip + falling lip + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e. The push order maintaining replay 3 is a lottery target role for reading promotion lip + rush lip + falling lip + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e. The push order maintenance replay 4 is a lottery target role for reading promotion lip + falling lip + templipa a + templipip c + templipip d + templipip e. The pushing order maintaining replay 5 is a lottery target role for reading promotion lip + falling lip + templip lip b + templip lip c + templip lip d + temple lip e.

  The push order rush replay 1 is a lottery target role that reads rush lip + falling lip. The push order rush replay 2 is a lottery target role for reading rush lip + falling lip + templip b. The push order rush replay 3 is a lottery target combination that reads rush lip + falling lip + templip lip c. The push order rush replay 4 is a lottery target role for reading rush lip + falling lip + templipa.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the RB lottery target combination and the number of determination values in BB.

  In the case of RB in BB, strawberry, BB strong strawberry, 12-sheet melon 1, BB melon, and 8-sheet melon are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as targets for internal lottery.

  A strawberry is a lottery target for reading out a strawberry. The BB strong strawberry is a lottery target role for reading strawberry + melon 2. The 12-sheet melon 1 means a lottery target role for reading out melon 1 + grape + strawberry. The BB melon is a lottery target combination that reads out melon 3 + melon 4 + grape + 1 sheet combination. The eight-sheet melon is a lottery target for reading out the melon 1.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the RB lottery target combination and the number of determination values in non-BB.

  When the gaming state is RB in a non-BB state, strawberry, left melon, middle right melon, 12-sheet melon 1, and strong grape 1 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as target roles for internal lottery. The left melon is a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + melon 3 + melon 4. The middle right melon is a lottery target for reading out melon 1 + melon 2.

[Internal lottery]
Next, the internal lottery will be described in detail. In the internal lottery, the variable display device 802 determines whether or not each of the winning combinations described above is allowed, that is, whether or not the symbol combination that generates the winning combination is allowed to be controlled to match any winning line. Is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 807 is operated). In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number circuit 842. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the acquired internal lottery random number, the gaming state, and the determination value of each winning combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 838 Depending on the number.

  In the present embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination such as a small combination and a replay combination, and a special combination with any of the general combination The range of judgment values to be won in combination with roles is specified, and winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general role and a special role are simultaneously won in one game. It can happen. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are subject to the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  The number of determination values acquired in the bonus internal lottery is set so as to increase as the set value increases. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  Also, RB, BB2, and BB3 can be won at the same time as a small combination or a re-playing combination. For example, when winning a strawberry, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any one of RB, BB2, and BB3 is stronger than in strawberry 1 to 4 than when winning in any one of weak strawberries 1-4. The number of determination values for each of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 and the strong strawberries 1 to 4 is set so that the value when one of the four is won is higher. As will be described later, different reel control is performed when the weak strawberries 1 to 4 are won and when the strong strawberries 1 to 4 are won, so the player can select one of RB, BB2, and BB3 from the reel control contents. The possibility of winning simultaneously can be predicted.

  Moreover, when winning a grape, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any of RB, BB2, and BB3 is higher than in the case of winning in any one of weak grapes 1-4. The number of determination values for each of the weak grapes 1 to 4 and the strong grapes 1 to 4 is set so that the value when one of the four is won is higher. As will be described later, since different reel control is performed when the weak grapes 1 to 4 are won and when the strong grapes 1 to 4 are won, the player can select one of RB, BB2, and BB3 from the reel control contents. The possibility of winning simultaneously can be predicted.

  In addition, when winning strawberry or grape, the percentage of winning simultaneously for RB, BB2, and BB3 is better when winning strawberry than when winning vine. The number of determination values is set so as to increase.

  In the general gaming state, as shown in FIG. 63, each of the push order melon 1 to the push order melon 5 is set to “2305”, and any one of the push order melon 1 to the push order melon 5 is 2305 × 5 / In order to win with a probability of 65536 = 111525/65536, the number of determination values is set so as to win with a higher probability than other lottery target roles.

  During the single bonus, for example, as indicated by the numerical value in parentheses, the number of determination values of the push order melon 1 is set to “2306” which is 1 larger than the normal gaming state. In this way, the winning combination probability of the small role is not improved significantly even if it is controlled to the single bonus by making the SB winning, but it is controlled to RT2 when the SB winning is made in any of the normal gaming state, RT1, RT3. Is done. For this reason, it can be said that the game progress is more advantageous for the player if the merit of winning the SB is small, but rather it is controlled to the normal gaming state where it can be missed and promoted to RT3 by the promotion lip winning. Note that the number of determination values in the single bonus is not limited to that shown in FIG. 63, but may be set so that the winning probability of at least one small role is higher than that in the normal gaming state. That's fine.

  Next, paying attention to the number of determination values of the re-gamer in FIG. 64, the winning probability of the re-gamer is compared for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, “2734” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “1020” is determined as the number of determination values when any of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is read. “98” as the number of determination values when “1” is read, “8” as the number of determination values when one of the BAR template replays 2 to 4 is read, and “4” as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read. "Is set. Therefore, the probability of winning any replay in the normal gaming state is 8980/65536. In addition, the probability of winning one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 that may be promoted to RT3 from the normal gaming state is 1020 × 6/65536 = 6120/65536.

  In RT1 and RT2, “8856” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, “98” is determined as the number of determination values when the BAR template play 1 is read, and any of the BAR template replays 2 to 4 is selected. “8” is set as the number of determination values when read, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when BAR replay is read. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT1 or RT2 is 8982/65536. It should be noted that RT1 and RT2 are set so as not to win a promotion lip or a rushing lip for shifting to RT3 or RT4.

  In RT3, “715” is determined as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “6586” is determined as the number of determination values when any of the push order maintaining replays 1 to 5 is read. “3500” as the number of determination values when any one of 4 is read, “98” as the number of determination values when BAR template play 1 is read, and any of BAR template plays 2 to 4 being read “8” is set as the number of determination values, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read. Therefore, the probability of winning any replay at RT3 is 47771/65536. In addition, the probability of winning one of the push order maintenance replays 1 to 5 and the push order entry replays 1 to 4 that may be dropped from RT3 to the normal gaming state is (6586 × 5) + (3500 × 4) / 65536 = 46930/65536. In addition, the probability of winning one of the push order entry replays 1 to 4 that may be entered from RT3 to RT4 is 3500 × 4/65536 = 14000/65536.

  In RT4, “47836” is read as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “98” is read as the number of determination values when the BAR template play 1 is read, and any one of the BAR template replays 2 to 4 is read. “8” is set as the number of determination values at that time, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR replay is read out. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT4 is 47962/65536.

  In the internal RT, “17000” is set as the number of determination values when the normal replay is read, and “98” is set as the number of determination values when the BAR template play 1 is read. “8” is set as the number of determination values when read, and “4” is set as the number of determination values when BAR replay is read. Therefore, the probability of winning either replay at RT4 is 17126/65536.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability that any one of the replays is won is set to be higher than that in the normal gaming state, RT1 to RT2, when it is RT3, RT4, and internal RT. Has been. Therefore, it can be said that RT3, RT4, and internal RT are advantageous for the player in that the winning probability of replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state, RT1 to RT2.

  Further, in RT3, although the winning probability of replay is high, the winning probability of falling lip is also high. Therefore, when not controlled by the AT described later, the RT3 is maintained, and the rushing lip is won and the RT4 is controlled. Is configured to be difficult. On the other hand, control of RT4 is maintained until 50 games are consumed. Therefore, it can be said that RT4 is an advantageous gaming state over RT3.

  In addition, when it is RT in the inside, it is set so that the winning probability of replay that is drawn preferentially over the bonus in the reel control is lower than that in the case of RT4 or the like, so that it is RT4. Compared with the case where the same replay winning probability is set, the ratio of winning the winning bonus can be increased.

  In the case of RB in BB, as shown in FIG. 65, the number of determination values of 12 melons 1 including melon 1 is set to “59578”, and it is set to win with a high probability of 59578/65536. ing.

  When the RB is in non-BB, as shown in FIG. 66, the number of determination values for the left melon and the middle right melon including melon 1 is set to “32604”, and each of the left melon and the middle right melon is 32604. It is set to win with a high probability of / 65536.

  When winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combinations or combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 841c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set.

  Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

[Reel stop control]
Next, stop control of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R will be described. The main CPU 841a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 841b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 802L, 802C, 802R corresponding to the operated stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one revolution at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 832L, 832C, and 832R. That is, by driving the reel motors 832L, 832C, and 832R for 168 steps, the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 59)) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is also 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel. Therefore, symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). Pull-in when the operation of the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 841a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames.

  Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position of the number of frames to be drawn from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 803). The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel).

  That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  If a special role has been carried over from before the previous game and a small role (such as a strawberry) is won, or if a special role is won at the same time as a simultaneous winning role, the winning small role will be 4 frames on the winning line. The number of draws is determined so that the maximum number of draws can be drawn in the range, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line in the range of up to 4 frames, the selected special role is 4 in the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the maximum number of frames can be drawn in the range of frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop them, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range.

  That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. As a result, after winning a small role and then winning a special role, the special role is won, and compared to the case where the special role is preferentially won, Since the special combination can be won, the player's medal can be increased as much as possible before the special combination is won, and reel control advantageous to the player is performed. When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the small combination.

  Next, in the case where a re-playing role is elected when the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and re-playing role are won simultaneously, the winning re-playing role is placed on the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible in the range of four frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a plurality of types of re-game players are simultaneously won (for example, push order promotion replay 1), as shown in FIGS. Control is performed so that the determined re-playing combination is stopped on the winning line in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In the present embodiment, among the three left reels 802L to 802R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop. Further, in this embodiment, forward pressing refers to an operation procedure in which the left reel 802L is first stopped and then the middle reel 802C is second stopped. Further, the forward clamping push means an operation procedure for stopping the right reel 802R for the second time after stopping the left reel 802L for the first time. The middle left push refers to an operation procedure in which the left reel 802L is second stopped after the middle reel 802C is first stopped. The middle right press refers to an operation procedure for stopping the right reel 802R for the second time after stopping the middle reel 802C for the first time. Reverse pinching push refers to an operation procedure in which the left reel 802L is stopped second after the right reel 802R is stopped first. The reverse pressing refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 802C for the second time after stopping the right reel 802R for the first time.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining reel control when one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is won.

  For example, when the push forward promotion replay 1 is elected, if it is operated by an operation procedure that becomes a forward push, the control for stopping the combination of the promoted rep in one of the winning lines in the winning replay. When the operation procedure is other than forward pressing, the normal lip combination is controlled so as to be aligned with any winning line and stopped.

  In addition, when the push order promotion replay 2 is won, if it is operated by the operation procedure that pushes forward, the combination of the promotion lip in the selected replay is stopped by aligning with any winning line. When the control is performed and the operation procedure other than the forward pinching operation is performed, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal lip is aligned with any pay line and stopped.

  Similarly, when any one of the push order promotion replays 3 to 6 is won, the player is operated according to an operation procedure of a predetermined push order determined according to the type of the push order promotion replay selected. In such a case, control is performed so that the combination of promotion lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped, and if the operation procedure is not in a predetermined order, the normal lip combination is set to any winning line. Control to stop them together.

  As described above, different operation procedures are set for each type of push-order promotion replay selected as the operation procedure for winning the promotion lip and promoting it to RT3. For this reason, even if one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is won in the normal gaming state, the promotion replies have a probability of only 1/6 unless the type of the push order promotion replay that has been won can be specified. Can be prevented from being controlled by RT3, and a normal lip is won with a probability of 5/6 and the normal gaming state is maintained. As a result, when not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, it is difficult to win the promotion lip so that it is not controlled to RT3 as much as possible, while when controlled by the AT, the promotion lip is awarded and controlled to RT3. Can be controlled.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when one of the pressing order maintaining replays 1 to 5 is won.

  For example, when the push order maintaining replay 1 is won, and it is operated by an operation procedure that becomes a forward push, the control for stopping the combination of promoted lips in one of the winning lines in the selected replay is stopped. When the operation procedure other than forward pressing is performed, control is performed to stop the combination of the falling lip on any pay line.

  In addition, when the push order maintaining replay 2 is won, if it is operated by the operation procedure that pushes in order, the combination of the promoted rep in the selected replay is aligned with any winning line and stopped. When the control is performed and the operation procedure other than the forward pinching operation is performed, the combination of the falling lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped.

  Similarly, when any one of the push order maintaining replays 3 to 5 is won, the player is operated according to an operation procedure having a predetermined push order determined in accordance with the type of the push order maintaining replay being won. In such a case, control is performed so that the combination of promotion lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped, and if the operation procedure is not in a predetermined order, the combination of falling lip is set to any winning line. Control to stop them together.

  In this way, as an operation procedure for winning the promotion lip and maintaining RT3, and an operation procedure for winning the fall lip and falling to the normal gaming state, for each type of push order maintenance replay selected , Different operating procedures are set. For this reason, in RT3, when one of the push order maintenance replays is won, unless the type of the push order maintenance replay that has been won can be specified, the promotion lip is awarded only with a probability of 1/5. RT3 cannot be maintained, and a fall lip is won with a probability of 4/5 to fall into the normal gaming state. Thus, when not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, even if controlled by RT3, it is easy to win the fall lip and control is performed so that the RT3 is not maintained as much as possible, while when controlled by the AT, It is possible to control so that the RT3 can be intentionally maintained by winning the promotion lip.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the reel control when one of the push order entry replays 1 to 4 is won.

  For example, when the push forward rush replay 1 is won, and it is operated by an operation procedure that becomes a forward push, the control for stopping the combination of the rush lip among the winning replays aligned with any winning line. When the operation procedure other than forward pressing is performed, control is performed to stop the combination of the falling lip on any pay line.

  In addition, when the push order rush replay 2 is won, if it is operated by an operation procedure that makes a squeeze push, the combination of the rush lip in the selected replay is aligned with any winning line and stopped. When the control is performed and the operation procedure other than the forward pinching operation is performed, the combination of the falling lip is aligned with any winning line and stopped.

  Similarly, when the push order rush replay 3 or 4 is selected, if it is operated according to an operation procedure having a predetermined push order determined according to the type of the push order rush replay being won, , Control to stop the combination of rush lip aligned with any winning line, and if it is operated with an operation procedure other than the predetermined push order, stop the combination of falling lip aligned with any winning line To control.

  In this way, as the operation procedure for making the entry lip a prize and entering the RT 4 and the operation procedure for making the fall lip a prize and fall into the normal gaming state, for each type of the push order entry replay selected , Different operating procedures are set. For this reason, when one of the push order rush replays is won in RT3, unless the type of the push order rush replay that has been won can be specified, the rush lip is awarded only with a probability of 1/4. It is configured to fall into the normal gaming state by winning a fall lip with a probability of 3/4. As a result, when it is not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, it is difficult to win the entry lip, so that it is not controlled to RT4 as much as possible. When the control is performed by the AT while being controlled so as not to be maintained, it is possible to control the RT 4 so as to win the rush lip.

  Further, when one of the BAR template plays 1 to 4 is won, the winning line L1 to L4 and the lower stage of the reel 802L, the lower stage of the reel 802C, the lower stage of the reel 802R while winning any of the selected replays. That is, reel control is performed in which two “black BARs” are aligned on any one of the lower lines extending over the symbols arranged in the lower stage.

  In addition, when BAR replay is won, within the range of the number of frames that can be drawn, the “black BAR” is stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L4 and reel control is performed to win the BAR lip, and the BAR lip is won. If it is not possible to win, one of the winning lines L1 to L4 and the lower line will be selected in the same manner as when one of the BAR templey replays 1 to 4 is won while winning one of the winning replays. The reel control is performed so that two “black BARs” are aligned together.

  Next, when multiple types of small roles are won simultaneously (such as a strawberry + 1-number role), the small role with a large number of payouts has a reel control that is drawn into the winning line preferentially over the small number with a small number of payouts. Done.

  As a case where a plurality of types of small roles are simultaneously elected, for example, when any one of the push order melons 1 to 5 is won, as shown in FIG. Different reel control is performed according to the operation procedure.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining reel control when one of the pressing order melons 1 to 5 is won.

  For example, when the push order melon 1 is won, and if it is operated according to an operation procedure that is a forward press, the symbol combination “melon-melon-melon” is stopped on the pay line L1, and an operation procedure other than the forward press is performed. Is operated in response to the stop operation, the control is performed to stop the “melon” of the reel to be stopped in the upper stage. That is, when the push order melon 1 is won and the operation is performed in the order of pushing, the “melon” of the middle reel 802C stops at the three pay lines L1, L3, and L4. 12 is paid out, but when operated by an operation procedure other than forward pushing, the “melon” of the middle reel 802C stops only on the winning line L2, and therefore, only 4 medals are paid out. In addition, when the push order melon 1 is won and operated in accordance with the forward push operation procedure, the “melon” of the left reel 802L and the right reel 802R is stopped on the pay line L1, whereas the order When an operation procedure other than pressing is performed, reel control is performed to stop the “melon” of the corresponding reel in the upper stage.

  In addition, when the push order melon 2 is won, if it is operated by the operation procedure of the forward pinching push, the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped on the pay line L1, and other than the forward pinching push. When operated according to the operation procedure, control is performed to stop the “melon” of the reel to be stopped in response to the stop operation. In other words, when the push order melon 2 is won and operated by the operation procedure of the pinch push, the “melon” of the middle reel 802C stops at the three winning lines L1, L3, and L4. When twelve medals are paid out, when operated by an operation procedure other than the forward push, the “melon” of the middle reel 802C stops only at the winning line L2, so that four medals are paid out. stay. In addition, when the push order melon 2 is won and operated by an operation procedure that is a forward push, the “melon” of the left reel 802L and the right reel 802R is stopped on the winning line L1, whereas When operated by an operation procedure other than forward pinching, reel control is performed to stop the “melon” of the corresponding reel in the upper stage.

  Similarly, when any of the push order melons 3 to 5 is elected, when it is operated according to an operation procedure having a predetermined push order determined according to the type of the push order melon being won. Is controlled to stop the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” on the winning line L1, pays out twelve medals, and when operated in an operation procedure other than a predetermined pushing order, ”Controls to stop only on the winning line L2, pays out four medals, and controls to stop the“ melon ”of the reel to be stopped corresponding to the stop operation among the left reel 802L and the right reel 802R. Do.

  As described above, as an operation procedure for stopping the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” on the winning line L1 and paying out 12 medals, there are different operation procedures for each type of push order melon selected. Is set. For this reason, when one of the pushing order melons 1 to 5 is won, unless the type of the pushing order melon being won can be specified, the winning line L1 has only a 1/5 probability. The combination of “Mellon” symbols cannot be stopped and 12 medals cannot be paid out, and only 4 medals are paid out by stopping “Melon” on the middle reel 802C only at the winning line L2 with a probability of 4/5. It is configured as follows. As a result, when one of the pushing order melons 1 to 5 is won, only four medals are paid out as much as possible when not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, and intentionally won when controlled by the AT. It is possible to stop the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” in the line L1, and control so that 12 medals are paid out.

  When any one of the 12 melons 1 to 4 is selected, regardless of the operation procedure, the “melon” of the middle reel 802C is stopped at the three lines of the winning lines L1, L3, and L4, and the winning line L1. Reel control is performed to stop the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” and pay out 12 medals.

  Next, the reel control when winning one of the weak strawberries 1 to 4, the strong strawberries 1 to 4, the weak grapes 1 to 4, and the strong grapes 1 to 4 will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining reel control when one of weak strawberries 1 to 4, strong strawberries 1 to 4, weak grapes 1 to 4, and strong grapes 1 to 4 is won.

  For example, when any one of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 or the weak grapes 1 to 4 is won, the combination of symbols constituting the winning strawberry or grape is selected within the winning line L2 Control to stop at any one of L4, that is, control to stop “strawberry” or “grape” at the upper or lower level as much as possible when focusing on the left reel 802L.

  On the other hand, when the strong strawberries 1 to 4 or the strong grapes 1 to 4 are won, the winning combination line L1 is stopped within the range of the number of drawn frames. Control, that is, control for stopping “strawberry” or “grape” in the middle as much as possible when focusing on the left reel 802L.

  As explained with reference to FIG. 63, when winning a strawberry, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any of RB, BB2, and BB3 wins in any of the weak strawberries 1-4. The number of judgment values for each of the weak strawberries 1 to 4 and the strong strawberries 1 to 4 is set to be higher than when the strong strawberries 1 to 4 are selected. When winning a grape, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any one of RB, BB2, and BB3 is stronger grapes 1-4 than when winning any one of weak grapes 1-4 The number of determination values for each of the weak grapes 1 to 4 and the strong grapes 1 to 4 is set so that the one when one of them is won is higher.

  For this reason, when strawberry or grape is won, the “strawberry” or “grape” of the left reel 802L is stopped at the middle stage, rather than when it is stopped at the upper or lower stage, RB, BB2 , And BB3 are highly elected at the same time, so the player's expectation can be improved.

  In addition, as explained with reference to FIG. 63, when winning a strawberry or grape, the ratio of winning simultaneously in any of RB, BB2, and BB3 is more than when winning a grape, The number of judgment values is set so that it is higher when winning a strawberry.

  For this reason, even when “Strawberry” or “Grape” on the left reel 802L stops at the middle stage and wins a strawberry or grape, the one when winning a strawberry is RB, BB2, and BB3. Since the ratio of winning simultaneously to either is high, the player's expectation can be improved.

  Next, the reel control when one of the left melon and the middle right melon is won in the non-BB RB will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining reel control when a left melon or a middle right melon is won in a non-BB RB.

  For example, when the left melon is won and the left reel 802L is operated according to an operation procedure for first stopping, the symbol combination “melon-melon-melon” is stopped on the winning line L1, and the left reel When operated in the operating procedure for first stopping other than 802L, control is performed to stop the symbol combination “melon-melon-melon” in the winning line L2. That is, when the left melon is won and the left reel 802L is operated according to the operation procedure for first stopping, the “melon” of the middle reel 802C stops at the two winning lines L3 and L4. 12 is paid out, but when operated in the operating procedure for first stopping other than the left reel 802L, the “melon” of the middle reel 802C stops only at the winning line L2, and therefore 8 medals are paid out. Stay on.

  In addition, when the middle right melon is elected, if it is operated by the operation procedure for first stopping the middle reel 802C or the right reel 802R, the symbol combination “melon-melon-melon” is displayed on the winning line L1. When the operation is performed in accordance with an operation procedure for stopping and first stopping the left reel 802L, control is performed to stop the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” on the winning line L2. That is, when the middle right melon is won and the operation is performed in the operation procedure of first stopping the middle reel 802C or the right reel 802R, the “melon” of the middle reel 802C is changed to two winning lines L3 and L4. In order to stop, twelve medals are paid out, but when operated by the operation procedure for first stopping the left reel 802L, the “melon” of the middle reel 802C stops only on the winning line L2, and thus the medal Will only be paid out.

  As described above, in the non-BB RB, when the left melon is won as an operation procedure for stopping the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” on the winning line L1 and paying out 12 medals. Different operating procedures are set depending on whether the middle-right melon is won or not. For this reason, unless it is possible to specify whether the left melon is won or the middle right melon is won, the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is placed on the winning line L1 only with a probability of 1/2. The medals cannot be paid out and 12 medals cannot be paid out, and the symbol combination of “melon-melon-melon” is stopped on the winning line L2 with a probability of 1/2 and only 8 medals are paid out. Yes. On the other hand, RB in non-BB is ended by winning four times. For this reason, according to the operation procedure in RB in non-BB, the net increase number in the said RB can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in RB in BB, when BB strong strawberry shown in FIG. 65 is won, reel control is performed to stop the combination of strawberry and melon 2 on the winning line. Both strawberry and melon 2 are operated according to the operation procedure. It is a winning combination that causes a loss. For this reason, in the RB in BB, when winning the BB strong strawberry shown in FIG. 65 and losing both strawberry and melon 2, “white 7” of each reel within the range of the number of drawable frames Reel control is performed to stop in the middle. Thereby, in RB in BB, when BB strong strawberry shown in FIG. 65 is won, reel control is performed so that “white 7-white 7-white 7” can be stopped on winning line L1.

  In addition, in the RB in the BB, there is a case in which any winning combination is not won from the number of determination values shown in FIG. 65. If the RB in the BB is lost, reel control is performed to stop the “black BAR” of each reel in the middle within the range of the number of drawable frames. As a result, when the RB in the BB is disengaged, the reel control is performed so that “black BAR−black BAR−black BAR” can be stopped on the winning line L1.

  In the RB in the BB, when “white 7-white 7-white 7” or “black BAR-black BAR-black BAR” is stopped on the winning line L1, an AT lottery is performed as described later.

[Processing by the main control unit 841]
Next, processing executed by the main control unit 841 in the slot machine 800 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 800, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game processing one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must first be in a state where the game can be progressed.

  In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the setting value work in the normal range is stored in the setting value work with the main control unit 841 including the main CPU 841a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 841c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready for progress, the game processing is repeated one by one in the slot machine 800. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 800 will be described.

  In the narrow sense, “game” in the slot machine 800 refers to a period from when the start switch 807 is operated until the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of 807, the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are also performed after the reels 802L, 802C, 802R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 838. When the processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the MAXBET switch 806 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 807 to substantially BET processing for instructing the start is performed.

  If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage). In the BET process, every time a bet number is set, a BET command that can specify the number of medals used for setting the bet number is transmitted to the effect control board 890.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 807 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value An internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery such as determining whether to perform or not is performed.

  Here, the internal lottery process will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing in detail the internal lottery process executed by the main control unit 841. In the internal lottery process, first, in S01, the number of BETs (number of bets) set in the current game is read. Next, in S02, it is determined whether or not the read bet number is a specified number. When the read number of bets is not a prescribed number, a RAM abnormality error occurs, and a predetermined RAM abnormality error process is performed.

  When the read bet number is a specified number, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 841c is read in S03, and in S04, the read set value is a range of 1 to 6 that should be originally taken. It is determined whether or not. If the read set value is not in the range of 1 to 6, a RAM abnormality error occurs and predetermined RAM abnormality error processing is performed.

  If the read set value is in the range of 1 to 6, in S05, a random number for internal lottery (such as a random number extracted from the random number circuit 842) is extracted and stored in the internal lottery determination area of the RAM 841c.

  In S06, as described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66, the number of determination values for the specified lottery target combination is acquired based on the gaming state and the set value. In S07, the obtained determination value number is added to the random number value stored in the internal lottery determination area of the RAM 841c, and the result of the addition is used as a new internal lottery value. In S08, it is determined whether a predetermined value (for example, 65536) has overflowed when the number of determination values is added to the value of the random number for internal lottery.

  If an overflow has not occurred, it is determined in S09 whether there is a next lottery target combination that is not yet a processing target among the lottery target combinations. If there is a lottery target that has not yet been processed, the process returns to step S06, and a lottery is performed with the next lottery target as a processing target. If there is no lottery target combination, the process proceeds to S11. In the internal lottery in the present embodiment, the lottery object combinations shown in FIGS. 63 to 66 specified from the gaming state are drawn in order.

  If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to S10, and the winning flag of the lottery target role corresponding to the number of determination values read in S06 is set to the ON state. In S11, an internal winning command for specifying the setting state of the winning flag in the RAM 841c is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 890.

  Also, in the internal lottery process in the present embodiment, freeze lottery is performed in which a random lottery or the like is used to randomly determine whether or not to generate a predetermined freeze according to the lottery result of the lottery subject. Freezing means delaying the rotation start timing of the reels 802L, 802C, 802R, delaying the timing for enabling the operation of the stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R, and the like.

  First, in S12, it is determined whether or not a predetermined winning situation is present. The predetermined winning situation in the present embodiment refers to a winning situation where one of 12 melons 1 to 4 is won and a winning situation where BAR replay is won. If it is determined in S12 that the predetermined winning situation is not reached, the internal lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S12 that the predetermined winning situation is established, the processes shown in S14 to S17 are performed. In S14, random numbers for freeze lottery (for example, random numbers extracted from random number circuit 842, random numbers extracted from random number circuit 842 by software in a predetermined procedure, random numbers dedicated to freeze lottery, etc.) Are extracted and stored in the freeze determination area of the RAM 841c. In S15, freeze lottery is performed according to the random number for freeze lottery stored in S14 and the freeze lottery table. The freeze lottery table refers to a table used to determine whether or not to execute freeze, and when to execute freeze.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 74, an example of the type of freeze and the freeze lottery table will be described. FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram for explaining the type of freeze, and FIG. 74 (b) is a diagram for explaining a freeze lottery table.

  The freeze includes a pre-rotation freeze that occurs before the rotation of each of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R and a post-rotation freeze that occurs after the rotation of each of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R starts.

  Freeze before rotation is when the operation of the start switch 807 is effectively accepted, or the time starts from the start of rotation of the reels 802L, 802C, 802R in the previous game in order to keep the one game digest time longer than a predetermined time When the operation of the start switch 807 is effectively accepted before being counted by the one game timer for a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds), the predetermined time is counted from the later one of the predetermined times. Freeze that delays the rotation start timing of each reel 802L, 802C, 802R until the delay time elapses.

  Freezing after rotation means that the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R are activated until a predetermined delay time elapses after the rotation speed of each reel 802L, 802C, and 802R starts to reach a constant speed. A freeze that delays timing.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), as the types of freezes, the first freeze in which only the pre-rotation freeze is executed over the delay time T1 and the pre-rotation freeze over the same T1 as the first freeze are performed. There is provided a second freeze that is executed and the freeze after rotation is executed over a delay time T2.

  In addition, although an example in which the same period is set for the period in which the pre-rotation freeze is performed in the first freeze and the second freeze will be described, the periods may be similar to each other. The period in which the pre-rotation freeze is executed in the first freeze and the second freeze is based on the length of the period in which the pre-rotation freeze is executed, whether the pre-rotation freeze is being executed by the first freeze or the second freeze. As long as the period is set so as to have a difference that the player cannot clearly identify whether or not For example, before the rotation of each of the first freeze and the second freeze, the difference X between the periods in which the freeze before rotation in each of the first freeze and the second freeze is performed is, for example, within a range of 0 <X <1. What is necessary is just to set the period for which the freeze is executed.

  It is determined with reference to the freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 74 (b) whether or not to execute the freeze and what type of freeze is to be executed. In the freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 74 (b), the winning rate is set so that the freeze lottery is performed according to different ratios when the 12-sheet melons 1-4 are won and when the BAR replay is won. .

  At the time of winning the 12-sheet melon 1-4, it is determined that there is no freeze at a rate of 10%, the first freeze is determined at a rate of 70%, and the second freeze is determined at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, at the time of winning the BAR replay, it is determined that there is no freeze at a rate of 5%, the first freeze is determined at a rate of 45%, and the second freeze is determined at a rate of 50%.

  In the present embodiment, freezing is performed at a higher rate in the BAR replay winning than in the 12-sheet melon 1-4 winning. Further, the second freeze is executed at a higher rate in the BAR replay winning than in the 12-sheet melon 1-4 winning.

  Returning to FIG. 73, in S16, the pre-rotation freeze counter for specifying the period for generating the pre-rotation freeze and the post-rotation freeze counter for specifying the period for generating the post-rotation freeze according to the result of the freeze lottery. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 841c. For example, when it is determined by the freeze lottery that the first freeze is executed, a value corresponding to the delay time T1 is set in the pre-rotation freeze counter, and when it is determined that the second freeze is executed, the pre-rotation freeze counter is determined. A value corresponding to the delay time T1 is set, and a value corresponding to the delay time T2 is set in the post-rotation freeze counter. When it is not determined that the freeze is executed by the freeze lottery, the pre-rotation freeze counter and the post-rotation freeze counter are maintained at zero. As will be described later, the main control unit 841 specifies the presence / absence and type of the freeze based on the pre-rotation freeze counter and the post-rotation freeze counter, and generates a freeze for a period specified by the counter when the freeze is executed. Process to make it happen.

  In S17, a freeze related command for specifying the result of the freeze lottery is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 890, and the internal lottery process is terminated. As will be described later, the effect control board 890 specifies the presence / absence of the freeze based on the freeze-related command, specifies the type when executing the freeze, and performs a process for executing the corresponding effect.

  In the internal lottery process, when one of BB1 to BB3 and RB is won, a process for controlling the internal medium RT (for example, setting the value of the internal medium RT flag to the value of the game state flag) is performed. It is.

  When the internal lottery process ends, the reel rotation process is performed next. Here, the reel rotation process will be described in detail. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing in detail the reel rotation process executed by the main controller 841.

  In the reel rotation process, first, in S30, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has been counted by one game timer. One game timer is a timer that is added and updated at regular time intervals (for example, timer interrupts).

  If it is determined in S30 that the time has been counted by the one game timer for a predetermined time or more, it is determined in S31 whether or not the pre-rotation freeze counter is 0, that is, whether or not the pre-rotation freeze is executed.

  When it is determined in S31 that the pre-rotation freeze counter is 0, the process proceeds to S34 and reel rotation is started as described later, but it is determined that the pre-rotation freeze counter is not 0 and the pre-rotation freeze is executed. When the pre-rotation freeze counter is zero, the process proceeds to S32 and S33 repeatedly until the pre-rotation freeze counter is executed over the period specified by the pre-rotation freeze counter.

  In S32, it is determined whether or not a predetermined subtraction condition (elapse of a certain time, more specifically, timer interrupt execution) is satisfied. When it is determined in S32 that the subtraction condition is satisfied, in S33, the value of the pre-rotation freeze counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to S31 again. Thus, the subtraction is started after it is determined that the pre-rotation freeze counter has been counted for a predetermined time or more by the one game counter.

  When it is determined in S31 that the pre-rotation freeze counter is 0, in S34, the reel motors 832L, 832C, and 832R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 802L, 802C, and 802R.

  When the reel rotation is started, a reel rotation command for notifying the start of reel rotation is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 890 in S35, and a new time is started by the one game timer in S36. Note that the timing for starting a new time count by the 1-game timer is not limited to when the reel rotation is started, even when YES is determined in S30 or when YES is determined in S37 described later. Good.

  In S37, it is determined whether or not a predetermined rotation condition (rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is satisfied from the start of rotation of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R. The rotation condition may be satisfied when the reference position is detected by the reel sensors 833L, 833C, and 833R in addition to the rotation speed reaching a constant speed.

  When it is determined in S37 that the rotation condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to S38, in which it is determined whether or not the post-rotation freeze counter is 0, that is, whether or not the post-rotation freeze is executed.

  If it is determined in S38 that the post-rotation freeze counter is 0, the process proceeds to S41 and the stop switch is enabled as described later, but if the post-rotation freeze counter is not 0 and the post-rotation freeze is executed. When it is determined, the process proceeds to S39 and S40 repeatedly until the post-rotation freeze counter becomes zero, and the post-rotation freeze is executed over a period specified by the post-rotation freeze counter.

  In S39, it is determined whether or not a predetermined subtraction condition (a certain time has elapsed, more specifically, timer interrupt execution) is satisfied. When it is determined in S39 that the subtraction condition is satisfied, in S40, the value of the post-rotation freeze counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to S38 again. As described above, the post-rotation freeze counter starts subtraction after the reel rotation is started and the rotation condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in S38 that the post-rotation freeze counter is 0, in S41, the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R are enabled to enable the operation to be received effectively, and the left / middle / right stop valid LEDs 822L to 822R Lights up.

  Thereafter, in S42, any one of the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R is operated by the player to stop driving the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch and stop the rotation. In S43, each time the rotation of any one of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R stops, a reel stop command that can specify the stopped reel and the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel is issued. It is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 890.

  In S44, it is determined whether or not all the reels 802L to 802R are stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 802L to 802R are not stopped, the process proceeds to S42. If it is determined that all the reels 802L to 802R are stopped, the reel rotation process is performed. finish. The slot machine 800 in the present embodiment will be described with respect to an example in which the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped by operating the stop switch. For example, whether or not the stop switch has been operated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel rotation started. Regardless of this, the rotating reel may be forcibly stopped.

  When the driving of each of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R is stopped, a winning determination process for determining whether one of the role symbols shown in FIG. 61 (a) is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. Is done. If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 840 are performed.

  In the winning determination process, after the winning determination is made, a winning determination command capable of specifying the presence / absence of a winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out is sent to the effect control board 890. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that any one of BB1 to BB3 and RB has been won, a process for controlling the corresponding bonus (for example, a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag is set) Etc.) and a process for deleting the winning flag of the corresponding bonus is performed.

  In addition, in the winning determination process in any of RT1, normal gaming state, and RT3, when it is determined that SB has been won, a process for controlling to RT2 (for example, the value of RT2 is set as the value of the gaming state flag) Etc.) are performed. Further, in the winning determination process in the normal gaming state, when it is determined that the promotion lip has been won, a process for controlling to RT3 (for example, setting the value of RT3 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, in the winning determination process in RT3, when it is determined that a winning lip is won, a process for controlling to RT4 (for example, setting the value of RT4 as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. Further, in the winning determination process in RT3, when it is determined that the fall lip has been won, a process for controlling to the normal gaming state (for example, setting the value of the normal gaming state to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. .

  In addition, when it is determined that no winnings have occurred in RT1, RT2, and RT3 and the special outcome is stopped in any of the winning lines L1 to L4, it is for controlling to the normal gaming state. Processing (for example, setting the value of the normal gaming state to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 834b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout exit 809.

  Also, in the payout process, when the payout of medals is started by payout of winnings or credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets), a payout start command for notifying the start of payout of medals is sent to the effect control board 890. When a medal payout by winning and winning a credit is completed, a payout end command for notifying the end of the medal payout is transmitted to the effect control board 890.

  In the payout process, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied during the bonus is performed as various processes not related to winning.

  In the bonus end determination process, when it is determined that the bonus end condition is satisfied, a process for controlling to RT1 (for example, setting the value of the RT1 flag as the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  Also, in the payout process during RT4, the number of games digested during RT4 (including games controlled by SB winning and single bonus) is countably specified, and whether the number of games digested reaches 50 games. When it is determined whether or not 50 games have been reached, a process for controlling to the normal gaming state (for example, setting the value of the normal gaming state to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  In the payout process, the game state of the next game (RT1 to RT4, whether it is a normal game state, internal RT, BB, non-BB RB, etc.) ) Is transmitted to the effect control board 890.

  In the payout process, a winning flag (small winning combination, re-playing winning combination, SB winning flag) that is not carried over is also deleted, and the winning flag of the BB or RB bonus stored in the special work is not deleted. As a result, the bonus winning flag is carried over to the next game until the winning bonus is won. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 890. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 841 of the game control board 840 shifts the game state among RT1 to RT4, internal RT, the normal game state, and the bonus, and the progress of the game In response, a command is transmitted to the effect control board 890. On the other hand, the sub control unit 891 of the effect control board 890 performs various processes based on the command received from the game control board 840.

  In the present embodiment, in the game control process executed by the main control unit 841, the specific variation control that repeats the temporary stop / revariation display (re-rotation) of the middle reel 802C while the freeze is generated. A specific variation control process is performed. Once the stop is performed, a special symbol for performing freeze control different from the normal symbol described in FIG. 59 is displayed in a variable manner, and the region number of the symbol to be stopped among those special symbols is displayed. The symbol corresponding to is stopped.

[Processing by sub-control unit 891]
Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 891 will be described. The sub-control unit 891 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state of the effect control board 890 to the state at the time of power supply stop, the effect-side random value Repeat the update process.

  Further, in the sub-control unit 891, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the production is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 891c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 891 is restarted, data backup required to restore the control state before the restart is performed. Is done.

  Further, a command analysis process for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 840 is executed, and a predetermined effect control process is executed. By this effect control process, various game effects are displayed according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 800, such as displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 851 and generating sound from the speakers 853 and 854. Image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in a predetermined ROM.

  In order to perform a game effect, the RAM 891c of the sub-control unit 891 has various counters, an area for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. The area for storing the winning status, the combination of display results derived from the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R, the information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred, and the game state applied in the game running on the game control board 840 side (The winning situation and the gaming state are twice) are also provided in the RAM 891c.

  Further, in the effect control board 890, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 802 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 891c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 891b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R. With reference to this table, the stop symbol table is stopped by the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R. The symbol is registered. The sub control unit 891 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  In addition, various random numbers counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 890, and after the contents of the saved register are restored, the effect control interrupt process is terminated.

  In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process, the sub control unit 891 performs an AT control process for controlling the effect state to the AT according to the game state and the like, and a game effect and a navigation effect according to the game state and the like. A game effect execution process for execution is performed.

[AT lottery processing]
The sub-control unit 891 performs an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control the AT by executing an AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the AT lottery process, it is determined based on a command from the main control unit 41 whether or not a predetermined AT lottery condition is satisfied, and when the AT lottery is satisfied, the AT lottery is executed. The AT lottery includes a navigation grant lottery that determines whether or not the number of navigation stocks is given, and a navigation stock lottery that decides the number of navigation stocks to be given.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1, the game is controlled by the AT while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50), and the navigation effect can be executed during that time. For this reason, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period.

[AT management processing]
The sub-control unit 891 performs the AT management process included in the AT control process when in the normal gaming state, RT3, or RT4, based on the AT flag and the incubation period set according to the AT lottery result. , Manage control to AT.

  Specifically, when the control to the normal gaming state is started, the sub-control unit 891 controls the AT when the AT flag is specified as AT. In the normal gaming state, the navigation effect can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks. When the RT3 is controlled by the promotion lip winning in the normal gaming state during the AT, the control to the AT is continued also in the RT3.

  When RT3 is controlled to RT4 by a rush lip winning in RT3 during AT, the start condition to AT by consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1 is satisfied, and RT4 while digesting the game a predetermined number of times (for example, 50) And it controls to ART which is AT. When the number of navigation stock is consumed, it is updated to the AT flag indicating the number of navigation stock subtracted by 1.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 891 performs AT management processing to count the number of games that have been digested in the case of ART, and to control to non-AT when the predetermined number of times has been reached. In the present embodiment, since the number of games controlled by AT by consuming 1 Navistock and the number of games controlled by RT4 are set to the same number of games, the number of games in ART is set to a predetermined number. When it reaches, the AT is terminated and the normal gaming state is controlled. At this time, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the AT flag is 0, it is updated to the AT flag indicating that it is not AT. In other words, a series of AT termination conditions are satisfied when the AT flag for controlling from AT to non-AT is 0.

  When it is specified from the AT flag when it is controlled to be non-AT that it is not AT, it is not controlled again by the AT and the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, after being controlled to the normal gaming state from RT4, the promotion lip, the falling lip, the winning lip winning probability, and the reel control at the time of winning, the promotion lip winning and the rushing lip winning are less likely to occur, the falling lip winning Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control to RT3 and RT4 and the control to RT3 from being continued as much as possible. As a result, the possibility that the game is played in the normal gaming state is increased.

  On the other hand, if the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag when controlled to non-AT is 1 or more, a latent period determination process is performed to determine a latent period until the next AT can be controlled. The The incubation period is a period of forcibly delaying the timing at which the start condition for allowing the AT to be controlled again after the AT controlled until the game is consumed a predetermined number of times by consuming 1 Navistock, etc. This is the period until the notification period can be reached again after the AT ends, that is, the period in which the AT is hidden. When the value of the maximum determination time counter is 1 or more, the incubation period becomes longer at a higher rate than when the maximum determination time counter value is 0.

[Game effect execution processing]
The sub-control unit 891 executes a navigation effect execution process included in the game effect execution process, so that, when controlled by the AT, the navigation target according to the game state based on a command from the main control unit 841 The navigation effect corresponding to the winning combination is executed.

  As a navigation effect when one of the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 is won, a push order (see FIG. 67) for causing the RT 3 to control the promotion lip in accordance with the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851 as a navigation effect when the push order promotion replay 1 is won. In addition, as a navigation effect when the push order promotion replay 2 is won, a message such as “order push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851.

  Further, as a navigation effect when winning one of the push order maintenance replays 1 to 5, a push order for maintaining RT3 by avoiding a falling lip winning prize and winning a promotion lip according to the winning situation (FIG. 68) is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851 as a navigation effect when winning the push order maintenance replay 1. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the push order maintenance replay 2, a message such as “order pinch push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851.

  Further, as a navigation effect when winning one of the push order rush replays 1 to 4, a push order for avoiding the falling lip winning and depending on the winning situation and causing the rush lip to win and controlling the RT 4 (see FIG. 69) is notified. For example, a message such as “forward push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851 as a navigation effect when winning the push forward entry replay 1. Further, as a navigation effect when winning in the push order entry replay 2, a message such as “order push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851.

  Further, as a navigation effect when winning one of the push order melons 1 to 5, the push order for stopping the “melon” of the middle reel 2C in the middle and paying out 12 medals according to the winning situation. (See FIG. 70) is notified. For example, a message such as “forward press” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851 as a navigation effect when the push order melon 1 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the push order melon 2, a message such as “push order push” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851.

  As described above, in the navigation effect in the present embodiment, a message reminiscent of an operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified in the same manner regardless of the type of the navigation target role. For this reason, the player can operate with an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player without being conscious of the type of the winning navigation target.

  In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient as long as a player can distinguish according to a winning condition. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851, but may be executed using the effect effect LED 852, the speakers 853 and 854, the reel LED 855, and the like.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 891 performs a game state effect execution process to display a game state effect related to the current game state or effect state, such as a liquid crystal display 851, effect effect LED 852, speakers 853 and 854, reel LED 855, and the like. Perform using the electrical parts.

  As the gaming state effect, for example, when it is non-AT (including the incubation period) regardless of the gaming state, a normal effect (for example, a message such as “normally being displayed” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851). . In addition, a special effect (for example, a message such as “AT in progress” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851) is performed during the AT regardless of the gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a bonus is provided for a predetermined period (for example, 5 games) on the condition that a strawberry or grape that can be simultaneously won with any of BB2, BB3, and RB has a relatively high probability. There will be a performance to recognize that you are selected. That is, as the gaming state effect, a continuous effect is provided for notifying information regarding whether or not the bonus is won over a predetermined period on condition that a strawberry or grape is won. This continuous effect is an effect in which, after performing an effect of developing a series of stories over a predetermined period, a bonus winning notification is made to notify the presence / absence and type of bonus winning as the ending of the story. Thereby, it can be said that the bonus may be won over a predetermined period, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when a bonus is won and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined game is consumed or a predetermined lottery is won), a bonus winning notification for notifying the presence and type of the bonus win is provided. Is done.

  When winning a strawberry or grape, a continuous effect is given as a game state effect for determining whether or not a bonus has been won. This continuous effect is an effect of notifying the presence or absence of a bonus winning as the end of a story after performing an effect of developing a series of stories over a predetermined period. Thereby, it can be said that the bonus may have been won over a predetermined period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Process to provide specific information]
FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating an aspect when the player shoots the shooting target area of the slot machine 800 and an example of an image displayed on the mobile terminal 100 in the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 76, when the player operates start switch 807, reels 802L, 802C and 802R start to rotate.

  Then, when the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R stop rotating according to the player's operation of the stop switches 808L, 808C, and 808R, the effect display is executed on the liquid crystal display 851 according to the display result. Here, the display result is an opportunity to indicate that some combination is won, and an effect display is performed as if the character notices that the display result is an opportunity.

  After such an effect is performed, the liquid crystal display 851 displays that the player is encouraged to hold the portable terminal 100 over the outcomes (display results) of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R.

  When such a message is displayed, the player activates the game application on the mobile terminal 100 and selects the specific information acquisition function in the displayed function selection menu. Thereby, the image acquisition / display process of FIG. 77 is executed.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of processing for acquiring specific information executed by the mobile terminal 100 and the information providing server 200 in the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 77, in step S101, a photographing mark that is an outline of fluoroscopic window 803, which is a photographing target region of slot machine 800, is placed in a region on the outer edge of the screen of display unit 140 of portable terminal 100 that is a predetermined range. The display unit 140 is controlled to display the effect. In addition to the display, it may be notified by voice instead of the display. Since the processing of step S102 and step S103 is the same as the processing described with reference to FIG. 44 of the first embodiment, repeated description will not be repeated.

  Referring again to FIG. 76, the player holds the portable terminal 100 at a position where the photographing target area can be photographed from the front of the slot machine 800, and carries the mobile phone for matching the outline of the fluoroscopic window 803 that is a photographing mark. The position to be held is finely adjusted so that the outline of the transparent window 803 matches the area of the outer edge of the screen of the display unit 140 of the terminal 100.

  Returning to FIG. 77, when it is determined that the outline of the fluoroscopic window 803, which is a photographic mark, is within the prescribed range of the outer edge area of the screen of the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 100 (when YES is determined in step S103). In step S104B, the data processing unit 110 captures an image of the area in the perspective window 803 of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R, which are the imaging target areas, as a still image and stores the image in the storage unit 120. The camera unit 190 is controlled. Next, in step S <b> 107 </ b> B, the wireless communication unit 160 is controlled to transmit the shooting data stored in the storage unit 120 to the information providing server 200.

  Referring again to FIG. 76, image data such as that displayed on the screen of the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 100 at the bottom of the figure is transmitted to the information providing server 200.

  Returning to FIG. 77, in the information providing server 200, the corresponding image transmission processing is repeatedly executed as a subroutine. In the corresponding image transmission process, first, in step S201B, the data processing unit 210 determines whether or not shooting data is received from the portable terminal 100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S201B), the data processing unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of the corresponding image transmission process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shooting data is received (YES in step S201B), the data processing unit 210 stores the received shooting data in the storage unit 220 in step S202B.

  Next, in step S203B, the characteristics of the display result of the slot machine 800 are analyzed from the stored shooting data. For example, it is analyzed whether the display result is a chance. The analysis of the display result is performed, for example, by recognizing the symbol edge of each reel 802L, 802C, 802R and grasping the recognized symbol area number. Note that it is only necessary to know the type of symbol, and it is not always necessary to know the area number.

  In step S204, the data processing unit 210 selects an image, which is specific information corresponding to the analysis result, from the provided information table. In this embodiment, during freezing, a special display result different from the normal display result is temporarily stopped, and the special display result is not selected for the normal display result. An image that is information is selected. For example, a specific symbol combination (for example, “black BAR-black BAR-black BAR” during reel rotation from the start of reel rotation until the operation of the stop switches 808L to 808C is validated (YES in S38 in FIG. 75). )) Is temporarily stopped, and when the same control as the normal reel rotation control is performed again, if this particular symbol combination is included in the image indicated by the shooting data, Specific information is selected. Note that an image that is specific information selected for a normal display result may be selected for the special display result.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an example of a provision information table according to the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 78, the analysis result shows that the upper stage of left reel 802L is a design of area number 0, the upper stage of middle reel 802C is the design of area number 0, and the upper stage of right reel 802R is a design of area number 0. In this case, the image data having the file name “IM0000.jpg” is selected as the image data that is the information to be provided.

  Similarly, image data corresponding to the analysis result of the symbols on the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 77, step S205 in the information providing server 200 and steps S111 and S112 in the portable terminal 100 are the same as the processing in FIG. 44 of the first embodiment, and thus the overlapping description is repeated. Absent.

  The image displayed in step S112 in the third embodiment will be described. Referring to FIG. 76 again, in this case, since the display result is a chance, an image indicating that it is a chance (here, an image in which the character is saying “Gekiatsu!”) Is displayed overlaid on the image.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

[About Freeze]
In the slot machine 800 shown in the above-described embodiment, when a freeze occurs, a predetermined freeze effect corresponding to an event that triggers the freeze control may be performed. The freeze effect is, for example, any one selected from an effect of displaying a specific character on the liquid crystal display 851, an effect of generating a specific sound from the speakers 853 and 854, and an effect of lighting the effect effect LED 852 in a predetermined mode. It may be an effect that is combined.

  Further, when the reel is rotated during the freeze, the following reel control may be performed.

  As a first example, a specific operation may be performed by the reels 802L to 802R at the start of reel rotation. Specific operations include, for example, an operation of starting rotation of only a specific reel before other reels, and a rotation of a reel that starts rotating before other reels after rotating at a speed different from normal. Any operation may be used as long as the operation is performed in a mode different from the normal operation, such as an operation of switching to a normal speed when starting the rotation of the reel, and an operation of rotating a specific reel in reverse for a predetermined time.

  Further, as a second example, when the reels 802L to 802R start to rotate without causing the freeze, the symbol combination and the symbol before the reel rotation is started before the operation of the stop switches 808L to 808C is validated. The symbols having a predetermined relative positional relationship in the arrangement order are variably displayed in synchronization with each of the reels 802L to 802R (more specifically, the combination of symbols having the predetermined relative positional relationship passes through the fluoroscopic window 803. In the case of performing normal reel rotation control (which rotates the reels 802L to 802R as described above), the following reel control may be performed when freezing occurs.

  For example, a specific symbol combination (for example, black 7-black 7-black 7) during reel rotation from the start of reel rotation until operation of the stop switches 808L to 808C is validated (YES in S38 of FIG. 75). ) Are aligned, a specific reel rotation control is performed to rotate each of the reels 802L to 802R so as to pass through the fluoroscopic window 803, and then a temporary stop control is performed to temporarily stop the symbol combination before starting the reel rotation. When the operation of the stop switches 808L to 808C is validated by performing the same control as the normal reel rotation control described above again, a predetermined relative positional relationship is obtained in the symbol combination and the symbol arrangement order before the reel rotation is started. Are displayed in a synchronized manner on each of the reels 802L to 802R. Each reel 802L~802R may be rotated to) such as's combination of symbols having the same predetermined relative positional relationship with the case where is not made to pass through the transparent window 803.

  Further, after the reel rotation is started and until the operation of the stop switches 808L to 808C is validated, the specific reel rotation control described above is performed, and then the rotation state is maintained without stopping the symbol combination before the reel rotation is started. As in the case where the above-described normal reel rotation control is performed without causing the freeze, the symbols having the same relative positional relationship are the same as when the symbols variably displayed on each of the reels 802L to 802R. After the special reel rotation control for restoring the rotation state is performed, when the operation of the stop switches 808L to 808C is validated by switching to the normal reel rotation control, the symbol combination and the symbol arrangement before starting the reel rotation Each of the reels 802L to 802R is a symbol having a predetermined relative positional relationship in order. (In more detail, each of the reels 802L to 802R is arranged so that a combination of symbols having the same predetermined relative positional relationship as the case where the freeze is not performed passes through the fluoroscopic window 803. (Rotate).

  When the second example is adopted, a specific symbol combination may be a symbol combination that may be won at the same time (for example, 12 melons 2 when the occurrence of freeze is a 12-sheet melon winning). For example, a symbol combination of RB, a bonus symbol combination selected at random in the case of 12 melons 1), or a symbol combination of BAR lip in the case of BAR lip winning. Thereby, the winning situation can be predicted from the symbol combination synchronized during the reel rotation, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, a freeze that allows a specific symbol combination to pass during reel rotation can be executed, for example, when a specific small combination is won, and a prize for the specific small combination is generated as a specific symbol combination. The winning symbol combination to be passed may be passed to notify that a specific small combination is won. Note that the specific symbol combination is not limited to the symbol combination in which the same symbol is aligned on the horizontal line and passes through the fluoroscopic window 803, but the perspective image is obtained by aligning different symbols on the horizontal line and passing through the fluoroscopic window 803. It may be a symbol combination that forms a predetermined pattern with a predetermined symbol when the entire window 803 is viewed. For example, in FIG. 59, the symbol combination of “black BAR” of area number 17 of the left reel 802L, “strawberry” of area number 19 of the middle reel 802C, and “banana” of area number 15 of the right reel 802R is a horizontal line. By aligning them upward, “white 7” may be arranged in a so-called V-shape in the upper left, middle lower, and upper right when the symbol combination passes over the winning line L1.

[Navigation production in the general gaming state]
The navigation target combination in the above-described embodiment is the push order promotion replays 1 to 6 including the promotion lip when in the normal gaming state, and the push order maintenance replays 1 to 5 including the rushing lip or the falling lip when it is RT3, The push order rush replays 1 to 4 and the push order melons 1 to 5 have been described for RT4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may make it alert | report that the winning combination of a strawberry or a grape was won when a winning combination was included including a strawberry and a grape.

  In addition, push order melons 1 to 5 may be included in the navigation target combination in the normal gaming state and RT3. In this case, the push order recalled from the navigation effect executed at RT3 is performed in order to prevent the game progress from being made to increase the medals by continuing the game at RT3 without being controlled by RT4. A process for imposing a predetermined penalty may be performed on the condition that the stop operation is performed in a different pressing order. The predetermined penalty may be any disadvantageous to the player in whether or not it is controlled by the AT. For example, when the AT lottery condition is satisfied, an AT lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player is performed. It may be a thing to make. For example, the AT flag indicating that it is not AT may be rewritten to forcibly terminate the AT, or the AT lottery may not be performed even if the AT lottery condition is satisfied.

[Navigation production during bonus]
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the navigation effect is not executed during the bonus has been described. However, even when the bonus is being performed, when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied (for example, when an AT flag indicating that the vehicle is AT is set), and when the predetermined winning situation is established, You may comprise so that the navigation production according to the applicable selection situation may be performed.

  During BB, when the winning situation is such that “Black BAR-Black BAR-Black BAR” or “White 7-White 7-White 7” can be stopped on the winning line L1, the navigation effect is given. You may make it perform. For example, a navigation effect that displays a message such as “Aim at White 7” may be executed when the BB strong strawberry is won, and a navigation effect that displays a message such as “Aim at Black BAR” may be executed at the time of a loss. . In addition, in RB during non-BB, a navigation effect may be executed to display a message such as “Press left” when winning the left melon, and a message such as “Press other than left” will be displayed when winning the middle right melon. A navigation effect may be executed. Thereby, the interest of the game during the bonus can be improved.

[Melon winning line]
In the above-described embodiment, when any of the push order melons 1 to 5 is won, as shown in FIG. 70, the operation procedure is stopped in a predetermined push order according to the type of the push order melon selected. On condition that switches 808L, 808C and 808R are operated, the condition that melon 1 of middle reel 802C is stopped in the middle stage and melon 1 is won in 3 lines and operated in a procedure different from the predetermined pushing order. As an example, an example in which the “melon” of the middle reel 802C is stopped in the upper stage and the melon 1 is won in one winning line has been described. However, the number of winning lines that the melon 1 wins when operated according to an operation procedure in a predetermined pushing order is not limited to three winning lines, and if there are a plurality of winning lines, for example, two or four winning lines. Also good. In addition, the number of winning lines that the melon 1 wins when operated in a procedure other than the operation procedure in a predetermined push order is not limited to one pay line, but is operated in an operation procedure in a predetermined push order For example, a plurality of winning lines may be used as long as the number of winning lines is smaller than the number of winning lines to be won.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the procedure for stopping the left, middle and right reels in a predetermined order has been described as an example of the procedure for performing the reel control for allowing the melon 1 to win a plurality of winning lines. However, the procedure for performing reel control for winning melon 1 to a plurality of winning lines is not limited to this, and may be a procedure for secondly stopping a predetermined reel among the left, middle, and right reels. The procedure may be to stop a predetermined reel among the left, middle and right reels first. Thereby, since the variation of the procedure in which the reel control which makes the melon 1 win a some winning line increases is performed, an interest can be improved.

[Reel control when pushing order melon is won]
In the embodiment described above, in FIG. 70, when any one of the push order melons 1 to 5 is selected, the operation is performed according to the operation procedure having the predetermined push order, and the operation having the predetermined push order. An example has been described in which different reel control is performed when operated by a procedure other than the procedure. However, the different reel controls are not limited to those shown in FIG. 70. For example, when the reels are operated according to an operation procedure in a predetermined pushing order, the winning combination that has not been won for each of the left reel 802L and the right reel 802R. Except for the case where a prize is won, control to stop at the timing when the stop operation is performed (control not to delay stop) is performed, and when operated in a procedure other than the operation procedure in a predetermined push order, the left reel 802L and the right reel For each of the 802Rs, control may be performed in which the winning combination is stopped with a delay from the timing of the stop operation, unless a winning combination that has not been won wins.

[Regarding the condition that it is not AT]
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the navigation effect is not executed without being controlled by the AT when the AT flag is specified from the AT flag has been described. However, even if the AT flag indicates that the vehicle is not AT, it may be controlled to AT with a predetermined probability, and a navigation effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. When the AT flag is specified as AT, the AT is controlled at a higher rate than when the AT flag is specified as AT, and the navigation effect is executed. Anything is acceptable.

[Relationship between specific game period and AT lottery condition establishment timing]
In the above-described embodiment, the maximum allowable AT lottery condition can be established on the condition that the specific game period ends as the relationship between the specific game period and the AT lottery condition establishment timing, An example in which the impossible AT lottery condition can be satisfied has been described. Thereby, since the timing at which the maximum allowable AT lottery condition is satisfied is easy to understand, the player can be surely paid attention to the timing, and the expectation can be maintained thereafter.

  However, the relationship between the specific game period and the AT lottery condition establishment timing is not limited to that shown in the above-described embodiment as long as the AT lottery condition is established in the specific game period. It may be. For example, a specific game period may be started by regular bonus winning and ended by the end of the regular bonus.

  Further, the maximum allowable AT lottery condition may be established by regular bonus winning or regular bonus winning. That is, the maximum allowable AT lottery condition may be satisfied on the condition that a specific game period is started, and the maximum impossible AT lottery condition may be satisfied thereafter.

  The specific game period is not limited to the period related to the regular bonus, but may be a period related to the big bonus, that is, a period from winning or winning the big bonus to ending.

[Number of times the AT lottery conditions are met]
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the maximum allowable AT lottery condition is established a smaller number of times than the number of times the maximum impossible AT lottery condition is established in a specific game period. However, the maximum allowable AT lottery condition may be configured to be always established a predetermined number of times in a specific game period as long as the maximum allowable AT lottery condition is established less than the number of times that the maximum impossible AT lottery condition is established. For example, the maximum allowable AT lottery condition may be established by winning a regular bonus or winning a prize. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the maximum number of times is determined a predetermined number of times during a specific game period. In this case, since the maximum allowable AT lottery condition is established only once during a specific game period, it is possible to concentrate on the one AT lottery while paying attention to the player. In addition, the number of times that the maximum disabling AT lottery condition is satisfied can be changed, and the interest of the game in a specific game period can be improved.

[Other variations]
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine 800 to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and giving a game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine 800 for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 830 and the insertion medal sensor 831, a ball take-in device that takes in the game ball, and a take-in ball that detects the game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 834b and a payout sensor 834c, a ball payout device for paying out a game ball, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting a game ball paid out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the promotion lip winning procedure, the rushing lip winning procedure, the fall replay avoidance procedure, and the “melon” of the middle reel 802C are in the middle stage. Although the example in which the stopping procedure is the pressing order of the stopping operation has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stopping operation timing may be included, and only the pressing order or only the stopping operation timing may be included. Not only a thing but what may become a pressing order + stop operation timing may be sufficient.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a special outcome that is a missed outcome at the time of winning the SB is derived to shift from RT1 or RT2 to the normal gaming state has been described. This is not the only opportunity for transition. For example, not only when winning the SB, but when the specific winning combination (specific small combination, specific re-playing combination) cannot be generated when the specific winning combination is won, Alternatively, it may be to win another specific winning combination that can be won at the same time as the specific winning combination.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the player is promoted to RT3 from the normal gaming state by winning the promotion lip, and is transferred from RT3 to RT4 by winning the rushing lip. The opportunity to be promoted to and the opportunity to transition from RT3 to RT4 are not limited to this. For example, the symbol combination that stops only when a predetermined winning combination is missed may be stopped. Accordingly, it is possible to add an interest that the gaming state is shifted instead of missing a predetermined winning combination.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, the imaging target area is the area of the fluoroscopic window 803. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display result of the fluoroscopic window 803 displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 851 in a reduced size may be used as the imaging target region.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating an aspect when the player photographs the photographing target region of the slot machine 800 and an example of an image displayed on the mobile terminal 100 in the modification of the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 79, in addition to prompting the player to hold the portable terminal 100 over the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R (display results) described with reference to FIG. A reduced scale of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R is displayed on the liquid crystal display 851.

  Rather than shooting the display result of the fluoroscopic window 803, shooting a reduced image on the liquid crystal display 851 allows shooting near the slot machine 800, which makes it easier for the player to shoot.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the region number of the symbol is identified from the contour of the symbol of the entire display result of the fluoroscopic window 803, and the specific information corresponding to the combination of the symbol of the identified display result is determined. I did it. In other words, the specific information corresponding to the symbol shape or a combination of symbol shapes in the entire display result of the fluoroscopic window 803 is determined.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and specific information corresponding to a determination unit (for example, a marker) or a combination of a plurality of determination units attached to at least a part of a symbol in the entire display result of the fluoroscopic window 803 is determined. Also good.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example of a feature aspect of a photographed image that is analyzed when specific information is determined in the modification of the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 80 (a), the specific information corresponding to the combination of some of the star markers of the symbol “7” is determined.

  In addition, specific information corresponding to a combination of a determination unit (for example, a marker) or a plurality of determination units attached to a part other than the symbol in the entire display result of the fluoroscopic window 803 may be determined.

  Referring to FIG. 80 (b), specific information corresponding to combinations of markers such as saddle-shaped lines, short line segments, and long line segments attached to portions other than the symbols of each reel 802L, 802C, 802R is determined. The

  Further, specific information corresponding to the color of the symbol or the color of the part other than the symbol in the entire display result of the fluoroscopic window 803, or a combination of a plurality of symbols or a plurality of symbols other than the symbol in the entire display result of the fluoroscopic window 803 The specific information corresponding to the color combination of the part may be determined.

  Referring to FIG. 80 (c), a combination of colors of a plurality of portions other than the symbols of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R of the transparent window 803 (here, portions other than the symbols of the plurality of reels) is, for example, “Red”, “blue”, and “yellow” are set, and specific information corresponding to this combination is determined.

  Referring to FIG. 80 (e), the color combinations of the plurality of symbols of the reels 802L, 802C, 802R of the transparent window 803 are, for example, “green”, “red”, “yellow”. Specific information corresponding to the combination is determined.

  Further, the specific information corresponding to the light emission mode of the reel LED 855 in the entire display result of the fluoroscopic window 803 may be determined.

  Referring to FIG. 80D, for example, reel LED 855 is caused to emit light in a V shape, and specific information corresponding to this light emission mode is determined.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, if the line for aligning symbols is an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage in the navigation effect, A information, B information, and C information are transmitted to the mobile terminal 100 as specific information, respectively. You may make it alert | report that it comes. Further, if the symbols to be aligned are red 7, blue 7 and yellow 7 in the navigation effect, notification is made that A information, B information and C information are transmitted to the mobile terminal 100 as specific information, respectively. May be.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the specific information corresponding to one display result that is a game history is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display results may be stored as a game history, and the specific information may be determined according to the stored game history.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the specific information corresponding to the display result of the slot machine 800 is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific information corresponding to the display result of the variation display of the identification information of the pachinko gaming machine 700 as described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is determined. May be.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the mobile terminal 100 transmits the shooting data to the information providing server 200, and the information providing server 200 analyzes the shooting data and specifies specific information (for example, an image) corresponding to the analysis result. ) Is determined, and the determined specific information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 100, and the mobile terminal 100 outputs (for example, displays) the transmitted specific information. In this case, an application program for executing the above-described image acquisition / display process shown in FIG. 77 is downloaded to the mobile terminal 100 in advance.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mobile terminal 100 may analyze the captured data, determine specific information corresponding to the analysis result, and output the determined specific information.

  In this case, an application program for executing this function, data for analysis, and data of specific information are downloaded to the mobile terminal 100 in advance. In this case, all processes for outputting the specific information can be performed only by the portable terminal 100 without accessing the information providing server 220.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment to the third embodiment, the information providing server 200 analyzes the captured image. In the fourth embodiment, the mobile terminal 100 analyzes the captured image.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing for acquiring specific information executed by the mobile terminal 100 and the information providing server 200 in the fourth embodiment. Referring to FIG. 81, the processing from step S101 to step S103 and the processing of step S104C are respectively the processing described in steps S101 to S103 of FIG. 44 of the first embodiment, and FIG. Since the process is the same as that described in step S104B of 77, the overlapping description will not be repeated.

  In step S <b> 105, the data processing unit 110 analyzes the characteristics of the display result of the slot machine 800 from the captured data stored in the storage unit 120 and identifies the area number of the symbol. The analysis of the display result is performed by the same method as described in step S203B of FIG.

  In step S106, the data processing unit 110 selects shooting result information from the area number of the pattern based on the shooting result information table.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of the imaging result information table according to the fourth embodiment. Referring to FIG. 82, the analysis result shows that the upper stage of left reel 802L is a design of area number 0, the upper stage of middle reel 802C is the design of area number 0, and the upper stage of right reel 802R is a design of area number 0. In this case, “0000” is selected as the photographing result information.

  Similarly, shooting result information corresponding to the symbol analysis results of the reels 802L, 802C, and 802R is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 81, in the next step S107C, the data processing unit 110 controls the wireless communication unit 160 to transmit the selected photographing result information to the information providing server 200.

  In the information providing server 200, in step S201C, the data processing unit 210 determines whether or not the photographing result information is received from the mobile terminal 100. If it is determined that it has not been received (NO in step S201C), the data processing unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of the corresponding image transmission process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the captured data has been received (YES in step S201C), an image that is specific information corresponding to the analysis result information is selected from the information provision table in step S204C.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of the provision information table according to the fourth embodiment. Referring to FIG. 83, when the photographing result information is “0000”, the image data with the file name “IM0000.jpg” is selected as the image data that is the provided information. Similarly, image data corresponding to the photographing result information is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 81, step S205 in information providing server 200 and step S111 and step S112 in portable terminal 100 are the same as the processing in FIG. 44 of the first embodiment, and thus the overlapping description is repeated. Absent.

[Modification of Fourth Embodiment]
Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.

  (1) In the above-described embodiment, the mobile terminal 100 analyzes the captured data, transmits the analysis result to the information providing server 200, and the information providing server 200 specifies the specific information corresponding to the analysis result (for example, The determined specific information is transmitted to the mobile terminal 100, and the mobile terminal 100 outputs (for example, displays) the transmitted specific information. In this case, an application program for executing the image acquisition / display process shown in FIG. 81 is downloaded to the mobile terminal 100 in advance.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mobile terminal 100 may analyze the captured data, determine specific information corresponding to the analysis result, and output the determined specific information.

  In this case, an application program for executing this function, data for analysis, and data of specific information are downloaded to the mobile terminal 100 in advance. In this case, all processes for outputting the specific information can be performed only by the portable terminal 100 without accessing the information providing server 220.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, the specific information corresponding to the display result of the slot machine 800 is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific information corresponding to the display result of the variation display of the identification information of the pachinko gaming machine 700 as described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is determined. May be.

[Summary]
Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.

  (1-1) A variable display device having a variable display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols (for example, an effect display device 709, a first special symbol display 708a, a second special symbol display 708b, reels 802L, 802C, 802R) (for example, a slot machine 800, a pachinko gaming machine 700), a terminal device (for example, portable) having a photographing unit (for example, camera unit 190) and an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker). Terminal 100) and a gaming system (for example, gaming system 10), wherein the terminal device controls the photographing unit to photograph an image to be photographed (for example, step of FIG. 77). S104B, step S104C of FIG. 81), and the gaming system is further photographed by the photographing unit Specific information output from the output unit in response to the stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area included in the image (for example, moving image, still image) (for example, content related to the game (current game state, The decision means (for example, step S203B, step S204 in FIG. 77, step S204 in FIG. 81) for determining the content (image, wallpaper, music, ringtone, AR, URL) not related to the game). (Step S105, Step S106, Step S204C) (The portable terminal 100, the information providing server 200, the pachinko gaming machine 700, the slot machine 800, the card unit, and the management device included in the gaming system 10 may be provided. And the terminal device further includes the special feature determined by the determination means. Output control means (for example, step S112 in FIGS. 77 and 81) for controlling the output unit to output constant information is included.

  According to such a configuration, an image to be photographed is photographed by the terminal device. The gaming system determines the specific information to be output by the terminal device in accordance with the symbol stop display in the entire variable display area included in the photographed image. The determined specific information is output by the terminal device.

  For this reason, in order to output the specific information, the player shoots a stop display of symbols in the entire variable display area. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming system that allows the player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

  (1-2) In the gaming system according to (1-1), the gaming machine includes positioning means (for example, the outline of the transparent window 803) when the stop display is photographed by the photographing unit.

  According to such a configuration, the position of the image indicated by the image data for each shooting can be prevented from being shifted. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the determination when the specific information corresponding to the stop display included in the image is determined.

  (1-3) In the gaming system according to (1-1) or (1-2), the determining unit is configured to combine a plurality of symbol shapes (for example, 7) in the stop display of the entire variable display area. The specific information corresponding to a symbol cross line) is determined.

  According to such a configuration, a combination of a plurality of symbol shapes in the stop display can be applied to the entire variable display area without affecting the shape of the symbol itself (shape, pattern or color, or combination thereof). Information for determining specific information can be used.

  (1-4) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-3), the determination unit is attached to at least a part of the symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area. The specific information corresponding to a combination of a plurality of determination means (for example, markers) is determined.

  According to such a configuration, the specific information corresponding to the combination of a plurality of determination means attached to at least a part of the symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area is determined without affecting the form of the symbols themselves. Information.

  (1-5) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-4), the determination unit is attached to a portion other than the symbol in the stop display of the entire variable display area. The specific information corresponding to a combination of a plurality of determination means (for example, markers) is determined.

  According to such a configuration, the specific information corresponding to the combination of the plurality of determination means attached to the portions other than the symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area is determined without affecting the form of the symbols themselves. Information.

  (1-6) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-5), the determination unit includes a combination of a plurality of symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area, or The specific information corresponding to a combination of colors of a plurality of portions other than symbols (for example, the left reel is red, the middle reel is blue, and the right reel is yellow) is determined.

  According to such a configuration, a combination of a plurality of symbol colors or a combination of colors of a plurality of parts other than the symbols in the stop display of the entire variable display area can be identified without affecting the shape of the symbol itself. It can be information for determining information.

  (1-7) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-6), the determining means is configured to emit a backlight in the stop display of the entire variable display area (for example, The specific information corresponding to the reel LED 855 emitting light in a V shape is determined.

  According to such a configuration, the light emission mode of the backlight in the stop display of the entire variable display area can be used as information for determining the corresponding specific information without affecting the form of the symbol itself.

  (1-8) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-7), the determining means uses the type of gaming state (for example, display) corresponding to the stop display as the specific information. The information for informing the latent production state corresponding to the result and the type of internally established bonus corresponding to the outcome) is determined.

  According to such a configuration, the specific information is output from the terminal device, whereby the player is notified of the type of gaming state corresponding to the stop display. For this reason, the player can be notified of the type of gaming state corresponding to the stop display. As a result, it is possible to provide a game system that is friendly to a player who is not familiar with the stop display.

  (1-9) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-8), the gaming machine can start a game by setting a bet amount for one game. In addition, a slot machine in which one game is finished by deriving a display result to the variable display device and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device. Operation accepting means (for example, start switch 807, stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R, MAXBET switch 806, etc.) for accepting an operation for advancing the game, and a plurality of types before the display result is derived to the variable display device A pre-determining means (for example, an internal lottery process) for determining whether or not the occurrence of the winning of the game is allowed, and a determination result of the pre-deciding means and In accordance with the operation received by the operation accepting means, the game progress is controlled due to the establishment of a game control means (for example, a main control unit) that controls the progress of the game and a predetermined delay condition (for example, BB end). Delay control means (for example, freeze generation processing) that performs delay control (for example, freeze) for delaying, and derivation operation reception means (for example, stop switch 808L) that accepts an operation for causing the variable display device to derive a display result. , 808C, 808R) and derivation control means (for example, reel rotation) for controlling the variable display device to derive the display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation received by the derivation operation reception means. Processing) and a plurality of the variable tables in the variable display area of the variable display device when the delay control is performed. A means for performing specific fluctuation control for temporarily stopping and re-variable display in at least one of the display sections, and determining a special stop display that is not stopped by the derivation control means when performing the specific fluctuation control Specific fluctuation control means (for example, specific fluctuation control processing, temporary stop control) for temporarily stopping the special stop display, and the determining means is temporarily stopped while the specific fluctuation control is being performed. The specific information is determined according to the special stop display.

  According to such a configuration, before an operation for advancing the game is accepted and the display result is derived on the variable display device, it is determined whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and the determination result The progress of the game is controlled in accordance with the accepted operation, and delay control is performed to delay the progress of the game due to the establishment of a predetermined delay condition, and the display result is derived by the variable display device. When the control is performed so that the variable display device derives the display result according to the determination result and the received operation, and the delay control is performed, a plurality of operations in the variable display region of the variable display device are performed. At least one of the variable display sections is subjected to specific fluctuation control for temporarily stopping and re-variable display, and is stopped as a display result when the specific fluctuation control is performed. Specially stop display determined never, 該特 by stopping the display is temporarily stopped, once in accordance with the special stop display is stopped while the specific variation control is being performed, the particular information is determined.

  For this reason, the special stop display that is not stopped as a display result when the delay control is performed and the specific variation control is performed is temporarily stopped, the specific information is determined according to the special stop display, and the terminal device Is output. As a result, the value of delay control can be further increased.

  (1-10) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-9), the gaming machine can start a game by setting a bet amount for one game. In addition, a slot machine in which one game is finished by deriving a display result to the variable display device and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device. Operation accepting means (for example, start switch 807, stop switches 808L, 808C, 808R, MAXBET switch 806, etc.) for accepting an operation for advancing the game, and a plurality of types before the display result is derived to the variable display device A pre-determining means (for example, an internal lottery process) for deciding whether or not to allow the occurrence of winnings, and a determination result of the pre-deciding means; In accordance with the operation accepted by the operation accepting means, game control means (for example, a main control unit) for controlling the progress of the game, and derivation operation accepting means for accepting an operation for causing the variable display device to derive a display result ( For example, a stop switch 808L, 808C, 808R) and a derivation control unit that performs control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination unit and an operation received by the derivation operation reception unit. (For example, reel rotation processing) and notification means (for example, navigation effect execution processing, liquid crystal display 851) for notifying information (for example, navigation effect) according to the determination result of the prior determination means, The notification means associates each of a plurality of types of the specific information with the stop display mode corresponding to the determination result (for example, (α) The line that aligns the information ⇔ design is the top, the line that aligns the B information ⇔ design is the middle, the line that aligns the C information ⇔ design is the bottom, (β) the pattern that aligns the A information 赤 is red 7, the symbol that aligns the B information 青 is blue 7, Information indicating that the information to be aligned is yellow 7) is notified.

  According to such a configuration, before an operation for advancing the game is accepted and the display result is derived on the variable display device, it is determined whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and the determination result The progress of the game is controlled according to the accepted operation, and an operation for causing the variable display device to derive the display result is accepted, and the variable display device is caused to derive the display result according to the determination result and the accepted operation. Control is performed, and information indicating the association between each of a plurality of types of specific information and a stop display mode corresponding to the determination result is notified according to the determination result.

  Therefore, the association between the specific information and the stop display mode corresponding to the determination result is notified, so that the player can derive the stop display according to the specific information desired to be acquired. To operate. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to derive a specific stop display, and the player operates the derivation operation accepting unit aiming at the timing at which the specific stop display is made, so that the interest can be improved.

  (1-11) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-10), the gaming machine is a timing at which the player captures an image including the stop display by the imaging unit. Is provided with a timing notifying means for notifying.

  According to such a configuration, the player is notified of the timing of capturing an image including a stop display by the capturing unit. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the progress of the game without being distracted by the shooting except for the timing of shooting. As a result, the stagnation of the progress of the game can be avoided as much as possible.

  (1-12) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-11), the gaming machine displays the stop display by reducing the entire variable display area. A reduction display control means for controlling is provided.

  According to such a configuration, the stop display is displayed by reducing the entire variable display area. For this reason, it is possible to make it easier to shoot compared to the case of shooting the entire variable display area that has not been reduced.

  (1-13) In the gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-12), the specific information is display data, and the output control unit is determined by the determination unit. In addition, the output unit is controlled to display the specific information superimposed on the image photographed by the photographing unit.

  According to such a configuration, the determined specific information is displayed on the terminal device so as to be superimposed on the image photographed by the photographing unit. For this reason, the sense of unity between the specific information and the captured image can be improved. As a result, the interest in displaying images on the terminal device can be improved.

  (1-14) In the gaming system according to (1-13), the display data is display data of augmented reality with respect to the stop display (for example, a character image is displayed on or around a shot face image taken) Display data).

  According to such a configuration, when the specific information is output from the terminal device, an image indicated by the augmented reality display data as the specific information is displayed over the stop display. For this reason, the stop display image displayed on the terminal device can be interesting.

  (1-15) The gaming system according to any one of (1-1) to (1-14), further including a game history storage unit that stores a game history in the gaming machine, wherein the determination unit includes: The specific information is determined according to the game history stored by the game history storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the game history in the gaming machine is stored, and the specific information is determined according to the stored game history. For this reason, since specific information changes according to a game history, the interest of the output of specific information can be improved.

  (1-16) The stop display is a display of the symbol in the entire variable display region when the symbol of the gaming machine having a variable display device having a variable display region for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols is stopped. The gaming system includes a determining unit that determines specific information to be output from the terminal device in accordance with the stop display included in the image captured by the terminal device.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming system that allows a player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

(1-17) In a terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having a photographing unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). There,
The photographing unit for photographing an image including a stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area when the symbol of a gaming machine having a variable display device having a variable display region for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols is stopped. Photographing control means (for example, step S104B in FIG. 77, step S104C in FIG. 81) for controlling
A transmission control unit that controls the communication unit to transmit the image to a determination unit that determines specific information to be output from the output unit according to the stop display included in the image captured by the imaging control unit. For example, step S107B in FIG. 77, step S107C in FIG. 81),
Reception control means for controlling the communication unit to receive the specific information from the determination means (for example, step S111 in FIGS. 77 and 81);
Output control means for controlling the output unit to output the specific information received by the reception control means (for example, step S112 in FIGS. 77 and 81).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a terminal device that allows a player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

  (1-18) In a terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having an imaging unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). An image including a stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area when the symbol of a gaming machine provided with a variable display device having a variable display region for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols is captured. A shooting control unit that controls the shooting unit, a determination unit that determines specific information to be output from the output unit in accordance with the stop display included in the image shot by the shooting control unit, and a determination unit that determines Output control means for controlling the output unit to output the specified information.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a terminal device that allows a player to pay attention to the entire stop display. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need to communicate with a device different from the terminal device (for example, a server including a determining unit) in order to determine the specific information corresponding to the stop display. For this reason, the system configuration can be simplified.

  (1-19) In a terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having an imaging unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). A game program (for example, a game app) to be executed, wherein the symbol of the game machine having a variable display device having a variable display region for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols is stopped when the symbol is stopped. The step of controlling the photographing unit to photograph an image including the stop display of the symbol in the whole (for example, step S104B in FIG. 77, step S104C in FIG. 81) and the stop display included in the photographed image. In response, the step of controlling the communication unit to transmit the image to a determination unit that determines specific information to be output from the output unit ( For example, step S107B in FIG. 77, step S107C in FIG. 81), a step of controlling the communication unit to receive the specific information from the determining means (for example, step S111 in FIGS. 77 and 81), and reception The terminal device is caused to execute a step of controlling the output unit to output the specified information (for example, step S112 in FIGS. 77 and 81).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game program that allows the player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

  (1-20) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 800, pachinko gaming machine 700) has a variable display device (for example, an effect display device 709, a first special symbol display) having a variable display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols. Terminal device that captures an image including a stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area when the symbol of the gaming machine including the device 708a, the second special symbol indicator 708b, and the reels 802L, 802C, 802R) A determination unit that determines specific information to be output from an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker) of the terminal device in accordance with the stop display included in the captured image (for example, mobile terminal 100). Transmitting the image to the terminal, receiving the specific information from the determining means, and outputting the received specific information Comprising the variable display device for displaying the stop display to be captured by the device.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to pay attention to the entire stop display.

  (2-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 700) having a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 706) through which a gaming medium (for example, a pachinko ball) passes, a photographing unit (for example, a camera unit 190), and an output A gaming system (for example, gaming system 10) including a terminal device (for example, mobile terminal 100) having a unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), wherein the terminal device controls the photographing unit. And a shooting control means for shooting the game area to be shot (for example, step S104 in FIG. 44), and the gaming system is further shot by the shooting unit (for example, as a moving image or a still image). In addition, a passage mode of the game medium (for example, a trajectory of a game ball, a game ball) in a specific area (for example, a shooting target area) of the game area Specific information output from the output unit according to the position) (for example, content related to the game (current game state, probability change latency), content not related to the game (image, wallpaper, music, ringtone, AR, URL)) Determining means (for example, step S203, step S204 in FIG. 44) (any of mobile terminal 100, information providing server 200, pachinko gaming machine 700, slot machine 800, card unit, and management device included in the gaming system) The terminal device further includes output control means for controlling the output unit to output the specific information determined by the determination means (for example, step S112 in FIG. 44). including.

  According to such a configuration, the shooting unit is controlled by the terminal device to shoot the game area to be shot, and the game system passes through the specific area among the game areas shot by the shooting unit by the gaming system. Depending on the mode, the specific information output from the output unit of the terminal device is determined, and the output unit is controlled by the terminal device to output the determined specific information.

  For this reason, it is possible to provide a game system that can improve the interest of the game by the effect that the game medium and the specific information are linked.

  (2-2) In the gaming system according to (2-1), the gaming machine may include positioning means (an edge of the shooting area of the game board or the shooting area of the game medium) when the shooting mode of the game medium is shot by the shooting unit. A decoration (for example, a ★ mark) provided at the center is provided.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the position of the game area to be photographed for each photographing from being shifted. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the determination when the specific information corresponding to the passage mode of the game medium included in the photographed game area is determined.

  (2-3) In the gaming system according to (2-1) or (2-2), the game system further includes a passage mode history storage unit that stores a history of the passage mode of each of the plurality of game media, and the determination unit Determines the specific information according to the history stored by the passage mode history storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the game system stores the history of the passage mode of each of the plurality of game media, and the specific information is determined according to the stored history.

  For this reason, the specific information according to the feature of the game area based on the feature of the passing mode of the game medium can be output by the terminal device. As a result, the interest of outputting specific information can be improved by the characteristics of the passage mode of the game medium.

  (2-4) In the game system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-3) above, the game area is provided with a movable member that changes a passing mode of the game medium, and the determining means Determines the specific information according to the movable state of the movable member imaged by the imaging unit.

  According to such a configuration, the specific information is determined by the gaming system according to the movable state of the movable member that changes the passage mode of the game medium.

  For this reason, the specific information according to the movable state of the movable member can be output by the terminal device. As a result, the interest of outputting specific information can be improved according to the movable state of the movable member.

  (2-5) In the game system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-4) above, the specific information is display data, and the terminal device determines the specific determined by the determining means Display control means is provided for controlling the output unit so as to superimpose and display information on the game area photographed by the photographing unit.

  According to such a configuration, the determined specific information is displayed on the terminal device so as to overlap the game area photographed by the photographing unit.

  For this reason, the sense of unity between the specific information and the photographed game area can be improved. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of displaying the photographed game area on the terminal device.

  (2-6) In the game system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-5), the game system further includes a game history storage unit that stores a game history in the gaming machine, and the determination unit includes the game The specific information is determined according to the game history stored by the history storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the game history in the gaming machine is stored, and the specific information is determined according to the stored game history. For this reason, since specific information changes according to a game history, the interest of the output of specific information can be improved.

  (2-7) The specific area is an area of the game area of the gaming machine having a game area through which a game medium passes, and the gaming system is configured to specify the specific area of the game area photographed by the terminal device. Determining means for determining specific information output from the terminal device in accordance with a passing mode of the game medium in the region;

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming system that can improve the interest of the game by the effect that the game medium and the specific information are linked.

  (2-8) In a terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having an imaging unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). The game area is an area through which a game medium of the gaming machine passes, and a shooting control means (for example, step S104 in FIG. 44) for controlling the shooting unit and shooting the game area to be shot, Information indicating the game area that has been shot is transmitted to a determination unit that determines specific information to be output from the output unit in accordance with a passing mode of the game medium in a specific area of the game area shot by the shooting unit. A transmission control means for controlling the communication section to control (for example, step S107 in FIG. 44) and the communication section to receive the specific information from the determination means. Reception control means (for example, step S111 in FIG. 44) and output control means (for example, step S112 in FIG. 44) for controlling the output unit to output the specific information received by the reception control means. Prepare.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a terminal device that can improve the interest of the game by the effect that the game medium and the specific information are linked.

  (2-9) A terminal device having a photographing unit, an output unit, and a communication unit, wherein the game area is a region through which game media of a gaming machine passes, and the game to be photographed by controlling the photographing unit Shooting control means for shooting an area; determination means for determining specific information to be output from the output section according to a passing mode of the game medium in a specific area of the game area shot by the shooting section; Output control means for controlling the output unit to output the specific information determined by the determination means.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a terminal device that can improve the interest of the game by the effect that the game medium and the specific information are linked.

  (2-10) In a terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having an imaging unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). A game program (for example, a game app) to be executed, wherein the game area is an area through which a game medium of the gaming machine passes, and the shooting section is controlled to shoot the game area to be shot (For example, step S104 in FIG. 44) and determining means for determining specific information to be output from the output unit in accordance with a passing mode of the game medium in a specific area of the game area imaged by the imaging unit. A step (eg, step S107 in FIG. 44) of controlling the communication unit to transmit information indicating the photographed gaming area; The step of controlling the communication unit to receive the specific information (for example, step S111 in FIG. 44) and the step of controlling the output unit to output the received specific information (for example, the step of FIG. 44). S112) is executed by the terminal device.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game program that can improve the interest of the game by an effect in which the game medium and the specific information are linked.

  (2-11) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 700) is a terminal device (for example, a portable terminal) that photographs a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 706) of a gaming machine through which a gaming medium (for example, a pachinko ball) passes. 100), and the terminal device according to a passing mode (for example, a trajectory of a game ball, a position of a game ball) in a specific area (for example, a target area) of the captured game area Transmitting the information indicating the gaming area taken to the determining means for determining the specific information to be output from the output section (for example, the display section 140, the speaker), and receiving the specific information from the determining means, and The game area is photographed by the terminal device that outputs the received specific information.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by the effect that the game medium and the specific information are linked.

  (3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 700) having a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 706) through which a gaming medium (for example, a pachinko ball) passes, a photographing unit (for example, a camera unit 190), and an output A game system (for example, the game system 10) including a terminal device (for example, the mobile terminal 100) having a display unit (for example, the display unit 140, a speaker). A trajectory changing member (for example, a nail 702, a windmill 703, a stage 704, a warp, etc.) for changing the trajectory is provided, and the terminal device controls the photographing unit to photograph the gaming area to be photographed. Control system (for example, step S104A in FIG. 53), and the gaming system is further controlled by the photographing unit (for example, moving images, static images). Arrangement state of the trajectory changing member in the game area taken as an image (distance between the first start winning port 713, the second starting winning port 714, the warp inlet nail 702 and the windmill 703, the nail 702 to the wall surface, Specific information to be output from the output unit according to the inclination of the windmill 703 and the stage 704 and the inclination of the nail 702 and the windmill 703 in an area where game media do not pass much (using this information to notify the recommended table of the day) For example, determination means (for example, step S203A in FIG. 53) that determines contents related to the game (current game state, probability change latency) and contents not related to the game (image, wallpaper, music, ringtone, AR, URL). Step S204) (the portable terminal 100, the information providing server 200, the pachinko gaming machine 700, the slot machine 800, the card unit included in the gaming system) The terminal device may further include an output control unit that controls the output unit to output the specific information determined by the determination unit. For example, step S112 in FIG. 53 is included.

  According to such a configuration, the shooting unit is controlled by the terminal device to shoot the game area to be shot, and according to the arrangement state of the trajectory changing member of the game area shot by the shooting unit by the gaming system. Specific information output from the output unit of the terminal device is determined, and the output unit is controlled by the terminal device to output the determined specific information.

  For this reason, it is possible to provide a game system that can improve the interest of the game by the effect in which the trajectory changing member and the specific information are linked.

  (3-2) In the gaming system according to (3-1), the gaming machine is provided with positioning means (at the edge or the center of the shooting area of the game board) when the shooting state is shot by the shooting unit. Provided decoration (for example, ★ mark)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the position of the captured image from being shifted for each shooting. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the determination when the specific information according to the arrangement state of the trajectory changing member included in the image is determined.

  (3-3) In the gaming system according to (3-1) or (3-2), the determining means includes an arrangement state of the trajectory changing member in the first area of the gaming area and the gaming area. The specific information is determined in accordance with an arrangement state of the trajectory changing member in a second region different from the first region.

  According to such a configuration, the game system changes the arrangement state of the trajectory changing member in the first area of the gaming area and the trajectory changing member in the second area different from the first area of the gaming area. The specific information is determined according to the arrangement state.

  For this reason, the specific information according to the arrangement | positioning state of the track | orbit change member of a several area | region can be output with a terminal device. As a result, the interest of outputting specific information can be improved by the relationship of the arrangement state of the trajectory changing member.

  (3-4) In the gaming system according to (3-1) to (3-3), the specific information is display data, and the terminal device determines the specific information determined by the determining unit, Display control means is provided for controlling the output unit to display the game area imaged by the imaging unit.

  According to such a configuration, the determined specific information is displayed on the terminal device so as to overlap the game area photographed by the photographing unit.

  For this reason, the sense of unity between the specific information and the photographed game area can be improved. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of displaying the photographed game area on the terminal device.

  (3-5) In the game system according to (3-1) to (3-4), the game system further includes a game history storage unit that stores a game history in the gaming machine, and the determination unit includes the game history storage unit. The specific information is determined according to the game history stored in step (b).

  According to such a configuration, the game history in the gaming machine is stored, and the specific information is determined according to the stored game history. For this reason, since specific information changes according to a game history, the interest of the output of specific information can be improved.

  (3-6) The trajectory changing member is a member for changing the trajectory of the gaming medium provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine having a gaming area through which the gaming medium passes, and the gaming system is a terminal device Determining means for determining specific information to be output from the terminal device in accordance with an arrangement state of the trajectory changing member included in the game area photographed by.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game system capable of improving the interest of the game by the effect in which the track changing member and the specific information are linked.

  (3-7) With a terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having an imaging unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). The game area is an area through which a game medium of the gaming machine passes, and the game area is provided with a trajectory changing member for changing the trajectory of the game medium, and the shooting unit is controlled to take a picture. Output from the output unit in accordance with the shooting control means for shooting the target game area (for example, step S104A in FIG. 53) and the arrangement state of the trajectory changing member in the game area shot by the shooting control means. Transmission control means (for example, step S10 in FIG. 53) for controlling the communication unit to transmit information indicating the taken game area to the determination means for determining the specific information. A), reception control means for controlling the communication unit to receive the specific information from the determination means (for example, step S111 in FIG. 53), and output the specific information received by the reception control means. Output control means (for example, step S112 in FIG. 53) for controlling the output unit.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a terminal device that can improve the interest of the game by an effect in which the track changing member and the specific information are linked.

  (3-8) A terminal device having a photographing unit, an output unit, and a communication unit, wherein the game area is an area through which a game medium of a gaming machine passes, and the game area has a trajectory of the game medium. A trajectory changing member for changing is provided, an imaging control means for controlling the imaging section to image the gaming area to be imaged, and an arrangement of the trajectory changing member in the gaming area imaged by the imaging control means A determination unit configured to determine specific information output from the output unit according to a state; and an output control unit configured to control the output unit to output the specific information determined by the determination unit.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a terminal device that can improve the interest of the game by an effect in which the track changing member and the specific information are linked.

  (3-9) In a terminal device (for example, portable terminal 100) having an imaging unit (for example, camera unit 190), an output unit (for example, display unit 140, speaker), and a communication unit (for example, wireless communication unit 160). A game program (for example, a game app) to be executed, wherein the game area is an area through which a game medium of the gaming machine passes, and the game area includes a track for changing the track of the game medium. A change member is provided, and the step of shooting the game area to be shot by controlling the shooting unit (for example, step S104A in FIG. 53) and the arrangement state of the trajectory change member in the shot game area The communication unit is controlled to transmit information indicating the photographed game area to a determination unit that determines specific information output from the output unit (for example, FIG. 53). Step S107A), controlling the communication unit to receive the specific information from the determining means (eg, step S111 in FIG. 53), and controlling the output unit to output the received specific information (Step S112 in FIG. 53) is executed by the terminal device.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game program that can improve the interest of the game by an effect in which the track changing member and the specific information are linked.

  (3-10) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 700) is a terminal device (for example, a portable terminal) that photographs a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 706) of a gaming machine through which a gaming medium (for example, a pachinko ball) passes. 100) according to the arrangement state of a trajectory changing member (for example, a nail 702, a windmill 703, a stage 704, a warp, etc.) for changing the trajectory of the game medium in the captured image game area. The information indicating the game area is transmitted to the determination unit that determines the specific information to be output from the output unit (for example, the display unit 140, the speaker) of the terminal device, and the specific information is received from the determination unit. And the game area photographed by the terminal device that outputs the received specific information.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by the effect in which the trajectory changing member and the specific information are linked.

  It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  10 gaming system, 100 portable terminal, 200 information providing server, 700 pachinko gaming machine, 707 gaming area, 708a first special symbol display, 708b second special symbol display, 709 effect display device, 720 first special variable prize Ball device, 745 2nd special variable winning ball device, 7560 game control microcomputer, 7100 effect control microcomputer, 800 slot machine, 802L, 802C, 802R reel, 808L, 808C, 808R stop switch, 840 game control board, 841 Main control unit, 841a Main CPU, 841b ROM, 841c RAM, 842 Random number circuit, 843 Pulse oscillator, 851 Liquid crystal display, 856 Production switch, 890 Production control board, 891 Sub control unit, 891a Sub CPU, 891b ROM, 891c RAM.

Claims (1)

A gaming system including a gaming machine having a variable display device having a variable display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a terminal device having a photographing unit and an output unit,
The terminal device
Including photographing control means for controlling the photographing unit to photograph an image to be photographed;
The gaming system further includes:
Determining means for determining specific information to be output from the output unit according to a stop display of the symbol in the entire variable display area included in the image captured by the imaging unit;
The terminal device further includes:
A game system comprising output control means for controlling the output unit to output the specific information determined by the determination means.

Images